Home

BMW Z4 Owner's Manual

1. Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Driving Controls Sport automatic transmission Remote control in the ignition lock or with Comfort Access inside the vehicle refer to page 39 1 Depress the brake pedal 2 Press the Start Stop button The starter operates automatically for a certain time and stops automatically as soon as the engine has started Engine stop Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children for exam ple cannot start the engine or release the parking brake Set the parking brake and further secure the vehicle as required Set the parking brake firmly when parking oth erwise the vehicle could roll On steep upward and downward inclines further secure the ve hicle for example by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb lt Manual transmission 1 With the vehicle at a standstill press the Start Stop button 2 Shift into first gear or reverse 3 Set the parking brake 4 Remove the remote control from the igni tion lock refer to page 57 Sport automatic transmission 1 With the vehicle at a standstill press the Start Stop button 2 Set the parking brake 3 Remove the remote control from the igni tion lock refer to page 57 Automatic Engine Start Stop Function The concept The Automatic Engine Start Stop Function helps save fuel and lower emissions The sys tem aut
2. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen sor remain switched off until the vehicle is locked again Power windows General information Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children for exam ple cannot operate the power windows and in jure themselves lt Danger of pinching Monitor the closing process and make sure that the closing path of the window is clear otherwise injuries may result lt Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Opening and closing Controls Opening closing Convenient opening and closing Convenient operation via the remote control Individuall refer to page 34 y aa Convenient closing with Comfort Access refer i 4 J gt to page 35 J Fi i After the ignition is switched off When the remote control is removed or the ig eD P nition is switched off the windows can con amy aa tinue to be operated for approx 1 minute as mmy lag long as no door is opened gt Press the switch to the resistance point Pinch protection system The window opens while the switch is held If the closing force exceeds a specific value as one of the front side windows closes the clos Closing can be performed in the same ane ing action is interrupted manner by pulling the switch gt Press the switch beyond the resistance The window reopens slightly point Danger of pinching even with pinch pro The wind
3. 78 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Displays Controls 3 Time c Time Date Time zone UTC 01 00 09 30 24h 27 05 2012 Format tt mm jjjj SET 1 Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display accompa nied by the date and the word SET 4 Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed and then press the control ler 5 Turn the controller until the desired mi PICSSRUNON A nutes are displayed and then press the 3 Use button 1 to set the day of the month controller 4 Press button 2 to confirm the entry The time is stored 5 Set the month and the year in the same way Setting the time format G Press button 2 1 Settings The system stores the new date 2 Time Date 3 Format Via the iDrive 4 Select the desired format 1 Settings The time format is stored 2 Time Date The settings are stored for the remote control 3 Date currently in use Personal Profile refer to 4 Turn the controller until the desired day is page 32 displayed and then press the controller 5 Make the necessary settings for the month and year Date The date is stored The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use Personal Profile refer to Setting the date format page 32 1 Settings 2 Time Date Setting the date Ime Date In the instrument cluster To set the dd mm or mm d
4. Depending on how the contacts were stored on the mobile phone the sorting order of the names may differ from the selected sorting or der Deleting contacts Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are deleted The contacts on the mobile phone cannot be deleted My contacts Highlight the contact Open Options Pe NS Delete contact or Delete all contacts 216 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 ConnectedDrive Communication ConnectedDrive Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations TeleService General information TeleService supports communication with your service center gt Data on the vehicle s service requirements can be sent directly to the service center In this way the service center can plan its work in advance This shortens the dura tion of the service appointment gt Inthe event of a breakdown data on the vehicle s condition can be sent directly to Roadside Assistance gt The service varies by country gt Connection costs may ensue Services may be restricted a
5. Detour suggestions from the navigation sys tem can be manually accepted when using semi dynamic destination guidance When us ing dynamic destination guidance they are au tomatically accepted for route guidance Semi dynamic destination guidance When traffic bulletin reception is switched on semi dynamic destination guidance is active The destination guidance system takes the available traffic bulletins into account A mes sage is displayed depending on the route the traffic bulletins and the possible detour routes If possible a detour is offered in case of traffic obstructions The upper part of the message shows gt Symbol of the first traffic obstruction pos sibly with the distance to the beginning of the obstruction 157 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 EW eF 1ielamm Destination guidance gt Total length of the traffic obstructions on Activating dynamic destination guidance the route 1 Navigation gt Time by which the trip is extended due to 2 Open Options the traffic obstructions 3 Dynamic guidance The lower part of the message shows gt Detour recommendation with the distance to the beginning of the detour gt Difference between the length of the new route compared to the original route gt Time gained if the detour is taken com pared to the original route with the traffic obstructions Both the original route shown in white and the detou
6. Owner s Manual for Vehicle The Ultimate Driving Machine THE BMW Z4 OWNER S MANUAL BMW EfficientDynamics Less emissions More driving pleasure Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Z4 Owner s Manual for Vehicle Thank you for choosing a BMW The more familiar you are with your vehicle the better control you will have on the road We therefore strongly suggest Read this Owner s Manual before starting off in your new BMW It contains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your BMW The manual also contains information designed to en hance operating reliability and road safety and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro chures in the onboard literature We wish you a Safe and enjoyable drive BMW AG Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 2015 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich Germany Reprinting including excerpts only with the written consent of BMW AG Munich deutsch II 15 03 15 500 Printed on environmentally friendly paper bleached without chlorine suitable for recycling Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Addendum ADDENDUM TO OWNER S MANUAL We wanted to provide you with some updates and clarifications with respect to the printed BMW Owner s Manual These updates and cla
7. Temperature grade for this tire The temperature grade for this tire is es tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinfla tion or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure lt RSC Run flat tires The symbol identifying run flat tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall refer to page 234 M S Winter and all season tires These have better winter properties than summer tires XL Designation for specially reinforced tires Tire tread Summer tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0 12 in 3 mm There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if the tread depth is less than 0 12 in 3 mm Winter tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0 16 in 4 mm Below a tread depth of 0 16 in 4 mm tires are less suitable for winter operation Minimum tread depth Wear indicators are distributed around the tire s circumference and have the legally re quired minimum height of 0 063 in 1 6 mm They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI Tread Wear Indicator Tire damage Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces as well as debris curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels tires and suspension parts This is more likely to occur with low profile tires which provide less cush ioning between the wheel and the road Be careful to avoi
8. Washer wiper system Notes Do not switch on the wipers if frozen Do not switch on the wipers if they are frozen onto the windshield otherwise the wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor may be damaged lt Do not use the wipers on a dry wind shield Do not use the wipers on a dry windshield oth erwise the wiper blades may wear more rap idly or become damaged lt Switching on wipers Press the lever up arrow The lever automatically returns to its initial po sition when released Normal wiper speed Press once The system switches to operation in the inter mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary Fast wiper speed Press twice or press beyond the resistance point The system switches to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary Switching off wipers or brief wipe Press the lever down arrow The lever automatically returns to its initial po sition when released Intermittent wipe or rain sensor If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor the intermittent wipe time is a preset If the car is equipped with a rain sensor the time between wipes is controlled automatically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield directly in front of the interior rearview mirror 63 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Driving Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensor Activating intermittent wip
9. 3 If necessary Bluetooth audio 4 Select the desired device from the list of paired devices 1 amp Bluetooth audio Add new phone Connected Handy 1 Paired Gerat 1 White symbol JJ the device is active as an audio source Playback General information gt The display of music track information de pends on the device gt Operation can takes place on the device or iDrive gt Playback is interrupted when data is ex changed via a mobile phone connected via Bluetooth Starting playback 1 Connect the device 2 CD Multimedia 3 External devices 187 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Entertainment _ CD multimedia 4 Select the symbol GF External devices t JUKEBOX lt Handy ax Vv Gerat r f AUX front He ie ug 5 Select the desired track from the list if necessary Playback menu Depending on the particular device some of the functions may not be available gt Next track Fast forward press and hold the symbol KI Previous music track Reverse press and hold the symbol Disconnecting the audio connection CD Multimedia Bluetooth audio Highlight the desired device Open Options Configure phone Audio OK P a r Unpairing a device 1 CD Multimedia 2 Bluetooth audio 3 If necessary Bluetooth audio 4 Highlight the device that is to be unpaired 188 5 Open Options 6
10. 7 Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller Status information Status field The following information is displayed in the status field at the top right Time Current entertainment source Sound output on off Wireless network reception strength Telephone status VV VV VV Traffic bulletin reception Status field symbols The symbols are grouped into various catego ries Symbol Meaning H HD Radio is switched on Satellite radio is switched on 23 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Ataglance GEIG iDrive Telephone symbols Incoming or outgoing call je Missed call lll Wireless network reception strength Symbol flashes searching for network aill Wireless network is not available DA Text message e mail was received G9 Check the SIM card m SIM card is blocked V2 SIM card is missing a Enter the PIN Entertainment symbols amp CD DVD player S Music collection Soe Gracenote database x AUX IN port p USB audio interface Mobile phone audio interface Additional symbols Spoken instructions are switched off E gt Request of the current vehicle posi tion 24 Split screen General information Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen e g information from the computer In the divided screen view the so called split screen this inf
11. A Music search 4 Change directories if needed to select Current playback tracks Top 50 To go up a level in the directory move the Audio CD 1 controller to the left v Frank USB 1 Random playback LIEBLINGSSONGS All tracks of the selection are played back in random order 1 CD Multimedia Top 50 2 Music collection The 50 most frequently played tracks CD Multimedia Music collection Top 50 Select the desired track if necessary 4 Select the desired track if necessary oS 180 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 CD multimedia Entertainment 3 Open Options 4 Random AVIE Options Free memory Delete music collection CD Multimedia O O Random Music data import export Managing music Albums Renaming an album The name of the album if available is automat ically entered when the album is stored If the name is not available it can be changed later if desired CD Multimedia Music collection Highlight the desired album Open Options a Se SS Rename album G Options Audio CD 1 Rename album Delete album Music collection Music data import export Free memory Delete music collection 6 Select the letters individually Deleting an album An album cannot be deleted while a track from that album is being played CD Multimedia Music collection Highlight the desired album Open Options ay YS Delete alou
12. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if there are people in it as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl edge lt Convenient closing When you are close to the vehicle the remote control for Comfort Access can be used to close the retractable hardtop and the windows LocK Press and hold the button on the re mote control The retractable hardtop and the windows are closed Monitor the closing process Monitor the closing process to ensure that no one becomes trapped Releasing the button stops the motion lt Switching on the interior lamps and courtesy lamps LocK Press the button on the remote con trol with the vehicle locked Unlocking the trunk lid B Press the button on the remote control for approx one second Note the opening height of the trunk lid During opening the trunk lid pivots back and up Ensure that there is sufficient clear ance when the trunk lid opens otherwise damage may result To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle do not place the remote control in the cargo area A previously locked trunk lid is locked again af ter closing Before and after each trip check that the trunk lid has not been inadvertently unlocked Convenient loading When you are close to the vehicle the remote control for Comfort Access can be used to par tially tilt the open hardtop for more convenient loading of the cargo area 1 Briefly press the button
13. Dynamic Driving Control refer to page 102 In addition kickdown is disabled Ending the Sport program manual mode Push the selector lever to the right D is displayed in the instrument cluster Shifting gears using the shift paddles on the steering wheel The shifting paddles make it possible to quickly change gears since both hands can re main on the steering wheel gt If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are used to shift gears while in automatic mode D the transmission temporarily switches to manual mode 67 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Driving gt Ifthe shift paddles are not used and the ve hicle is not accelerated for a certain time the system switches back into automatic mode if the selector lever is in transmission position D gt Shift up pull right shift paddle gt Shift down pull left shift paddle The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropri ate engine and road speeds e g it does not shift down if the engine speed is too high The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in strument cluster followed by the current gear Displays in the instrument cluster The transmission position is displayed and the engaged gear such as M4 is displayed in manual mode 7 gear Sport automatic transmission with dual clutch The concept This transmission is an automated manual transmission with two clutches and two gear 68 box co
14. Hydroplaning 131 Ice warning refer to External temperature warning 73 Icy roads refer to External temperature warning 73 Identification marks tires 231 iDrive 20 iDrive changing the date and time 78 iDrive changing the units of measure and display for mat 78 Ignition 58 Ignition key position 1 refer to Radio ready state 58 Ignition key position 2 refer to Ignition on 58 Ignition key refer to Remote control with integrated key 32 Ignition lock 57 Ignition switched off 58 Ignition switched on 58 Indication of a flat tire 95 Indicator and warning lamps Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 98 Indicator and warning lights 17 Individual air distribution 111 Inflation pressure refer to Tire inflation pressure 228 Inflation pressure warning tires 94 Information on the navigation data 140 Initializing compass refer to Calibrating 119 Initializing Flat Tire Monitor FTM 95 Installation location tele phone 124 Instrument cluster 16 Instrument lighting 90 Instrument panel refer to In strument cluster 16 Instruments refer to Cock pit 14 Integrated key 32 Integrated universal remote control 116 Interactive map 147 Interior equipment 116 Interior lights 91 Interior lights remote con trol 35 Interior mirror 53 Interior motion sensor 42 Interior rearview mirror auto matic dimming 53 Interior rearview mirror com pass 118 Interior temperature setting refer to Air conditio
15. Navigation system version Information is displayed on the data ver sion Updating the navigation data General information Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can be updated Current navigation data and the authorization code are available from your service center gt Depending on the data volume a data up date may take several hours Update during the trip to preserve battery During the update only the basic functions of the navigation system are available The status of the update can be viewed gt After the updating process is complete the system restarts gt Remove the medium with the navigation data after the update Performing an update 1 Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD player with the labeled side facing up 2 Follow the instructions on the Control Dis play 3 Enter the authorization code of the naviga tion DVD 4 Change the DVD if necessary After the trip is interrupted follow the instruc tions on the Control Display Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Navigation system Navigation Viewing the status 1 Open Options 2 Navigation update Removing navigation DVD 1 Al Press button 1 The DVD emerges slightly from the drive 2 Remove the DVD 141 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Navigation Destination entry Destination entry Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series eq
16. Parts and accessories For your own safety it is recommended that you use genuine parts and accessories ap proved by BMW When you purchase accesso ries tested and approved by BMW and Genu ine BMW Parts you simultaneously acquire the assurance that they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum perform ance when installed on your vehicle BMW warrants these parts to be free from defects in material and workmanship BMW will not ac cept any liability for damage resulting from in stallation of parts and accessories not ap proved by BMW BMW cannot test every product made by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely and without risk to either the vehicle its operation or its occupants Genuine BMW Parts BMW Acces sories and other products approved by BMW together with professional advice on using these items are available from all BMW cen ters Installation and operation of non BMW approved accessories such as alarms radios amplifiers radar detectors wheels suspension components brake dust shields telephones including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna or transceiver equipment for instance CBs walkie talkies ham radios or similar accessories may cause extensive dam age to the vehicle compromise its safety in terfere with the vehicle s electrical system or affect the validity of the BMW Limited War ranty See you
17. Programmable memory but tons iDrive 24 Protective function refer to Pinch protection system windows 43 Push and turn switch refer to Controller 21 R Radiator fluid refer to Cool ant 241 Radio operated key refer to Remote control with integrated key 32 Radio ready state 58 Radio ready state switched off 58 281 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Reference Everything from A to Z Radio ready state switched on 58 Radio setting refer to Radio ready state 58 Rain sensor 63 Random 173 Random playback 173 Range 75 RDS 165 Reading lights 91 Reading out loud 212 Rear lamp refer to Tail lamp bulb replacement 248 Rear lights refer to Tail lights 247 Rearview mirror refer to Mir rors 52 Rear window de froster 111 114 Recirculated air mode 110 113 Reclining seat refer to Back rest 48 Recommended tire brands 235 Redialing 201 Refueling 224 Remaining range refer to Range 75 Reminders 212 Remote app 221 Remote control 32 Remote control battery re placement 41 Remote control Comfort Ac cess 39 Remote control garage door opener 116 Remote control malfunc tion 36 Remote control removing from the ignition lock 57 Remote control tailgate 35 Remote control univer sal 116 Remote inquiry 200 282 Remote Services 221 Replacement fuses refer to Spare fuses 250 Replacement remote con trol 32 Replacing wheels tires 234 Reporti
18. Remove phone from list G Options EY Split screen Close control display Ger t 2 Configure phone Remove phone from list Bluetooth audio O Bluetooth audio What to do if Information on suitable devices can be found at www bmwusa com bluetooth Suitable mobile phones refer to page 194 The device is not supported by the vehicle gt Perform a software update refer to page 189 if needed The device could not be paired or connected gt Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device and the vehicle match Enter the same passkey on the device and via iDrive gt Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter the passkey Repeat the pairing proce dure gt Are too many Bluetooth devices con nected to the device or vehicle Delete connections with other devices if neces Sary gt Is the mobile phone in power save mode or does it have only a limited remaining bat tery life Charge the mobile phone in the snap in adapter or via a charging cable gt Depending on the mobile phone it is pos sible that only one device can be con nected to the vehicle Unpair the con nected device from the vehicle and pair and connect only one device gt The device no longer reacts Switch the device off and on again gt Repeat the pairing procedure Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 CD multimedia Entertainment Music cannot be played back gt Start the program for playing back music
19. Replacing the wiper blades Working on the lighting system When working on the lighting system you should always switch off the lights af fected to prevent short circuits To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer Do not touch the bulbs Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare hands as even minute amounts of 1 Fold up the wiper arm contamination will burn into the bulb s surface 2 Fold the wiper blade upwards and reduce its service life 245 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Mobility Replacing components Use a clean tissue cloth or something similar or hold the bulb by its base lt Light emitting diodes LED Light emitting diodes installed behind translu cent lenses serve as the light source for many of the controls and displays in your vehicle These light emitting diodes which operate us ing aconcept similar to that applied in conven tional lasers are officially designated as Class 1 light emitting diodes Do not remove the covers Do not remove the covers and never stare into the unfiltered light for several hours otherwise irritation of the retina could result lt Headlight glass Condensation can form on the inside of the ex ternal lights in cool or humid weather When you drive with the lights switched on the con densation evaporates after a short time The hea
20. Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Ata glance The concept Mobile phones or other external devices such as audio players can be connected to the vehi cle via Bluetooth Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue tooth SIG Inc After these devices are paired once they are recognized automatically when the ignition is switched on as soon as they are in the vehicle and can then be operated via iDrive the but tons on the steering wheel and via voice acti vation Depending on their functionality external devi ces can be used via the vehicle as a telephone or as an audio source The telephone functions are described in the following Operating the audio functions refer to page 185 Up to four external devices can be paired Certain functions may need to be enabled by the mobile phone provider or service provider Using the mobile phone while driving Make entries only when traffic and road conditions allow Do not hold the mobile phone in your hand while you are driving use the hands free system instead If y
21. ated during transmission will be discharged from the vehicle interior lt Hydroplaning On wet or slushy roads a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan ing It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle Hydroplaning When driving on wet or slushy roads re duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning lt Driving through water Drive though calm water only if it is not deeper than 9 8 inches 25 cm and at this height no faster than walking speed up to 6 mph 10 km h Adhere to water depth and speed limita tions Do not exceed this water depth and walking speed otherwise the vehicle s engine the electrical systems and the transmission may be damaged lt Braking safely Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand ard feature Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations when this is neces Sary The vehicle maintains steering responsive ness You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering effort Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode 131 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Driving tips Objects in the area around the pedals No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mat
22. gt Each time the lever is pressed beyond the resistance point the desired speed is in creased by up to 5 mph 10 km h The system stores and maintains the speed Accelerating using the lever Accelerating slightly Press the lever to the resistance point arrow 1 and hold until the desired speed is reached Accelerating significantly Press the lever beyond the resistance point arrow 1 and hold until the desired speed is reached The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal The system stores and maintains the speed Decreasing speed Repeatedly pull the lever to the resistance point or beyond arrow 2 until the desired speed is displayed gt Each time the lever is pulled to the resist ance point the desired speed is decreased by approx 1 mph 1 km h gt Each time the lever is pulled beyond the resistance point the desired speed is re duced by up to 5 mph or 10 km h until the minimum speed of 20 mph 30 km h is ach ieved The system stores and maintains the speed Interrupting the system Push the lever upwards or downwards ar row 3 The displays in the speedometer change color In addition the system is automatically inter rupted in the following situations gt When the brakes are applied gt In cars with manual transmission when gears are shifted very slowly or if neutral is engaged 106 gt In cars with Sport automatic transmission when transmission po
23. gt To end reading turn the controller to the left What to do ff Information on suitable mobile phones refer to page 194 Appointments tasks notes text messages or e mails from the mobile phone are not dis played gt The mobile phone is not capable of the missing function or is not connected cor rectly The Office function is deactivated The mobile phone is connected as an addi tional phone gt Appointments are older than 20 days or are more than 50 days in the future gt The tasks have been marked as completed or have a due date that lies more than 90 days in the future Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Office Communication gt Depending on the number of stored ap pointments task notes and messages in the mobile phone not all are displayed in the vehicle Not all appointments and tasks from the mo bile phone are displayed at the right time gt The time zone time or date is incorrectly set on the Control Display and mobile phone The e mail attachment is not displayed gt E mails are transmitted without an attach ment Entries are not displayed in full length gt Text were already transmitted from the mobile phone in a shortened form gt Synchronization between the mobile phone and vehicle may take several mi nutes The contact pictures are not being displayed gt Upto 200 contact pictures can be stored in the vehicle The E mail
24. lt In the case of a malfunction deactivation and after triggering of the airbags Do not touch the individual components imme diately after the system has been triggered otherwise there is the danger of burns Only have the airbags checked repaired or dis mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by your service center or a workshop that has the necessary authorization for handling explo sives Non professional attempts to service the sys tem could lead to failure in an emergency or undesired triggering of the airbag either of which could result in injury Warning notices and information about the air bags can also be found on the sun visors Automatic deactivation of the passenger airbags The system determines whether the front pas senger seat is occupied by measuring the re sistance of the human body The front and side airbags on the front passenger side are acti vated or deactivated accordingly by the sys tem The indicator lamp above the interior rearview mirror shows the current status of the passen ger airbags deactivated or activated refer to Status of passenger airbags below Passenger feet in the footwell Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the footwell otherwise the front passenger airbags may not function properly Child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat Before transporting a child on the passenger seat read the safety and operating ins
25. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to en sure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 100 Brake force display The concept gt During normal brake application the brake lamps light up gt During heavy brake application the turn signals light up in addition The brake force display is not activated if the turn signal function is switched on Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Driving stability control systems Controls Driving stability control systems Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Antilock Brake System ABS ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking The vehicle remains steerable even during full brake applications thus increasing active Safety ABS is operational every time you start the en gine Electronic brake force distribution The system controls the brake pressure in the rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior Dynamic
26. If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available con tact Customer Relations or the service center Controls Adjusting the volume Turn the knob until the desired volume is se lected The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of the microphone on the telephone and the volume of the called party Depending on the mobile phone the volumes may need to be ad justed The settings can only be created during a call and must be adjusted separately for each telephone The settings are deleted when the telephone is unpaired Settings Tone Volume settings ee SS Select the desired setting Microphone or Loudspeak To adjust turn the controller 6 To store press the controller Incoming call Receiving calls If the number of the caller is stored in the phone book and is transmitted by the network Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Communication the name of the contact is displayed Other wise only the phone number is displayed If more than one phone number is assigned to a contact only the name of the contact is dis played For calls on the additional telephone the num ber is only displayed if it is transmitted by the network An incoming call to one of the telephones is automatically rejected if there is an active call on the other telephone ra Pr
27. Manual transmission Observe before towing your vehicle Gearshift lever in neutral position Being towed Blocked parking brake The parking brake cannot be released manually When the parking brake is blocked do not tow the vehicle or else it may be damaged Contact your service center lt Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Breakdown assistance Mobility Follow the towing instructions Follow all towing instructions or vehicle damage or accidents may occur lt gt Make sure that the ignition is switched on otherwise the low beams tail lights turn signals and windshield wipers may be un available gt Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle tilted as the front wheels could turn gt When the engine is stopped there is no power assist Consequently more force needs to be applied when braking and steering gt Larger steering wheel movements are re quired gt The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed otherwise it will not be possible to control the vehicle response Tow truck Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck with a so called lift bar or on a flat bed Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts otherwise damage may result Towing other vehicles General information Light towing vehicle The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed o
28. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a substi tute of another color or amperage rating this could lead to a circuit overload ultimately re sulting in a fire in the vehicle A pair of plastic tweezers is found on the cur rent distributor See the inside of the cover for information on fuse assignment 250 Below the glove compartment 1 Remove the screws 1 using the screw driver from the onboard vehicle tool kit 2 Remove cover 2 unwinding the cable to the footwell lamp if necessary 4 Fold the current distributor 4 downward and pull forward The cover is reinstalled in reverse order Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Breakdown assistance Mobility Breakdown assistance Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Hazard warning system The button for the hazard warning system is located on the center console Intelligent Emergency Request Requirements gt Radio readiness is switched on gt The Assist system is operable gt The SIM
29. Oil level 238 Oil refer to Engine oil 238 Oil types alternative 240 Oil types approved 240 Old batteries disposal 250 Onboard computer refer to Computer 75 Onboard Diagnostics OBD 244 Onboard monitor refer to Control Display 20 Onboard vehicle tool kit 245 Opening and closing Comfort Access 39 Opening and closing from the inside 37 Opening and closing from the outside 34 Opening and closing using the door lock 37 Opening and closing using the remote control 34 Operating principle iDrive 20 Outside air mode automatic climate control 113 Outside air refer to Recircu lated air mode 110 113 Overheating of engine refer to Coolant temperature 74 P Paint vehicle 258 Pairing mobile phone 195 Park Distance Control PDC 107 Parked vehicle condensa tion 132 Parking aid refer to PDC 107 Parking brake 61 Parking lamps 87 Passenger side mirror tilt ing 52 PDC Park Distance Con trol 107 Personal information 205 Personal Profile 32 Pinch protection win dows 43 Plastic care 259 Pollen refer to Microfilter activated charcoal filter with automatic climate con trol 114 Pollen refer to Microfilter for air conditioner 111 Position storing 144 Postal code entering in navi gation 143 Power failure 249 Power windows opening and closing 43 Power windows refer to Win dows 42 Pressure tires 228 Pressure warning tires 94 Pressure warning tires Flat Tire Monitor 94
30. These limitations apply to all claims in cluding without limitation claims in con 156 Navigation Destination guidance tract and tort such as negligence product liability and strict liability Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of inci dental or consequential damages so those particular limitations may not apply to you gt The traffic bulletins are indicated on the map by symbols gt The traffic bulletins for the surrounding area are stored in a list AX The symbol in the function bar of the map view turns red if there are traffic bulle tins that affect the calculated route Switching the reception on off 1 Navigation 2 Open Options 3 Receive Traffic Info Opening the list of traffic bulletins 1 Navigation 2 Map 3 AX Traffic Info First traffic bulletins for the calculated route are displayed The traffic bulletins are sorted by their dis tance from the current position of the vehi cle 4 Select a traffic bulletin More information display additional information 5 Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin if required Traffic bulletins on the map Traffic conditions gray map active The Control Display changes to a black and white display This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins The day night mode is disre Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Destination guidance Navigation garded in this set
31. Updating software via USB The software may only be updated when the vehicle is stationary 1 Store the file for the software update in the main director of a USB flash drive 2 Insert the USB flash drive into the USB au dio interface in the center armrest An up date via the USB interface in the glove compartment is not possible 3 Settings 4 Software update 5 Update software amp Software update Software update for the support of external devices Show current version Update software Restore previous version 7 OK All listed software updates are installed Restoring the previous version The software version prior to the last software update can be restored The previous version can only be restored when the vehicle is stationary Settings Software update Restore previous version OK Double click All listed software updates are removed ye o 189 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Entertainment _ CD multimedia Note While the software is being updated or a previ ous version is being restored BMW Assist Of fice functions and the connected devices are temporarily unavailable Wait several minutes for the functions to become available again 190 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 CD multimedia Entertainment 191 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Communication Telephone Telephone
32. apply to cold tires or tires at ambient tempera ture Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold This means after a maximum of 1 25 miles 2 km driving or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours The values displayed by tire inflation stations may be up to 0 1 bar 2 psi too low For the Flat Tire Monitor after adjusting the tire inflation pressure to a new value reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor refer to page 94 For the Tire Pressure Monitor after adjusting the tire inflation pressure to a new value reset the Tire Pressure Monitor refer to page 97 Pressure specifications The tables below provide all the correct infla tion pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient temperature The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes approved and tire brands recommended by BMW a list of these is available from your service center For correct identification of the right tire infla tion pressures observe the following gt Tire sizes of your vehicle gt Maximum allowable driving speed Tire inflation pressures for driving up to 100 mph or 160 km h For normal driving up to 100 mph 160 km h adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pressures listed on the following pages in the column for traveling speeds up to 100 mph 160 km h to achieve optimum driving comfort Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Wheels and tires this speed otherwis
33. computer Split screen on board infos Split screen trip computer Splitscreen trip computer Split screen scale automatically Split screen automatic scaling lt Destination guidance with intermediate destinations Enter a new destination Enter address Trip list Stored trips Radio TI Open a frequency Frequency megahertz e g 93 5 megahertz or frequency 93 5 Open the radio Radio Open the FM stations F Mc 269 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 RGG Short commands of the voice activation system Open the manual search gt Manuak Select a frequency range gt Select frequency Open a station gt Select station AM Open a frequency Frequency Kilohertz e g fre quency 753 or 753 kilohertz Open the AM stations A Me Open the manual search Manuak Satellite radio Open the satellite radio gt Satellite radio lt Switch on the satellite radio gt Satellite radio on Select a satellite radio channel gt Select satellite radiox e g satellite radio channel 2 Stored stations Open the stored stations Presets Choose a stored station gt Select preset Select a stored station Preset lt e g stored station 2 270 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Short commands of the voice activation system WROCKA CD multimedia CD DVD drive Select a track Play back a CD Select a CD Select a CD and
34. data on the device and select a track on the device if necessary gt Switch the radio on and off again Music files can only be played back softly gt Adjust the volume settings on the device Playback is disturbed when buttons are pressed or by other messages on the device gt Switch off the button tones and other sig nal tones on the device Playback is interrupted by a telephone call or traffic bulletin and is not resumed automati cally gt Switch the radio on and off again Playback is not possible if the mobile phone is connected via Bluetooth Audio while it is also connected via the USB interface or the snap in adapter gt Disconnect one of the two connections for example disconnect the audio connection refer to page 188 Start playback again If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available please contact the hotline or service center Software Update The vehicle supports various external devices depending on the current software version With a software update the vehicle can sup port new mobile phones or new external de vice for example gt USB Software updates and related current infor mation is available at www bmw com update Displaying the current version The currently installed software is displayed 1 Settings 2 Software update 3 Show current version Select desired version to display additional in formation
35. may be malfunctioning However the BMW Response Center may still be able to Jump starting hear you a Notes Initiating an Emergency Request If the battery is discharged an engine can be automatically started using the battery of another vehicle Under certain conditions an Emergency Re and two jumper cables Only use jumper ca quest is automatically initiated immediately af bles with fully insulated clamp handles ter a severe accident Automatic Collision Noti fication is not affected by pressing the SOS button To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles adhere strictly to the following proce dure Do not touch live parts Warning triangle To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in jury always avoid all contact with electrical components while the engine is running Preparation 1 Check that the battery of the other vehicle has a voltage of 12 V This information can be found on the battery 2 Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi Se AN cle The warning triangle is located in a holder in 3 Switch off any electronic systems power the trunk lid Press the tabs to take it out consumers in both vehicles Bodywork contact between vehicles between the bodywork of the two vehicles otherwise there is the danger of short cir cuits lt First aid kit Make sure that there is no contact Starting aid terminals Connecting order Connect the jumper cables in the correct order
36. otherwise there is the danger of injury E d from sparking lt The first aid pouch is located on the lateral storage shelf behind the seats Some of the articles contained in the first aid pouch have a limited service life 252 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 The so called starting aid terminal in the en gine compartment acts as the battery s posi tive terminal The body ground or a special nut acts as the negative terminal Connecting jumper cables 1 Pull off the cap of the BMW starting aid ter minal 2 Attach one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis tance 3 Attach the other end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started 4 Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle providing as sistance 5 Attach the other end of the cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to the Breakdown assistance corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started Starting the engine Never use spray fluids to start the engine 1 Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an in creased idle speed If
37. screen and turn the controller Traffic bulletins At a glance gt Display the traffic bulletins from radio sta tions that broadcast the TI Traffic Informa tion of a traffic information service Infor mation on traffic obstructions and hazards is updated continuously Certain BMW models equipped with navi gation have the capability to display real time traffic information If your system has this capability the following additional terms and conditions apply An End User shall no longer have the right to use the Traffic Data in the event that the End User is in material breach of the terms and conditions contained herein A Total Traffic Network a division of Clear Channel Broadcasting Inc Total Traffic Network holds the rights to the traffic in cident data and RDS TMC network through which it is delivered You may not modify copy scan or use any other method to reproduce duplicate republish transmit or distribute in any way any por 155 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 tion of traffic incident data You agree to in demnify defend and hold harmless BMW of North America LLC BMW NA and Total Traffic Network Inrix Inc and their affiliates against any and all claims dam ages costs or other expenses that arise di rectly or indirectly out of a your unauthor ized use of the traffic incident data or the RDS TMC network b your violation of this directive and or c any u
38. tem 243 BMW Online 218 Bottle holder refer to Cu pholder 126 Brake assistant refer to Dy namic Brake Control 101 Brake discs breaking in 130 Brake force display 100 Brake force distribution elec tronic 101 Brake lights adaptive 100 Brake lights brake force dis play 100 Brake lights bulb replace ment 247 Brake pads breaking in 130 Brake refer to Parking brake 61 Brakes ABS 101 Braking notes 131 Braking parking brake 61 Breakdown assistance refer to Roadside Assistance 217 Break in 130 Brightness of Control Dis play 80 Bulbs replacing refer to Lamps and bulbs 245 Button for starting the engine refer to Start Stop but ton 57 Buttons on the steering wheel 14 Bypassing see Starting aid 252 C Calendar 210 California Proposition 65 Warning 7 Camera care 260 Can holder refer to Cu pholder 126 Capacities 265 Capacities cargo area refer to Weights 264 Capacities fuel tank refer to Filling capacities 265 Car battery 249 Car care products 258 Care 257 Care displays 260 Care vehicle 258 Cargo 132 Cargo area 121 Cargo area capacity 264 Cargo area capacity enlarg Ing 121 Cargo area Comfort Ac cess 40 Cargo area lamp refer to In terior lights 91 Cargo area opening from the inside 38 Cargo area opening from the outside 38 Cargo securing 122 Cargo straps securing cargo 134 Car key refer to Integrated key remote control 32 Carpet
39. tened and neither the brake pedal nor the accelerator is activated gt The engine is switched off unless N is en gaged and the remote control is in the igni tion lock gt The remote control is removed from the ig nition lock refer to page 57 66 Before leaving the vehicle ensure that the transmission position P is engaged otherwise the vehicle may begin to roll Engaging transmission position gt Transmission position P can only be disen gaged if the engine is running and the brake pedal is pressed gt With the vehicle stationary press on the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N otherwise the shift command will not be executed shift lock Press on the brake pedal until you start driving To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start lt Engaging transmission positions D R N Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di rection beyond a resistance point if necessary When shifting out of P or into R simultane ously push the unlock button 1 The engaged transmission position is dis played on the selector lever After releasing the selector lever it returns to its center position Engaging transmission position P Select only when the vehicle is stationary Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Driving Controls iC Viii V 2 A Sport program DS an
40. well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Note The technical data and specifications in the Owner s Manual serve as guidelines Detailed values can be obtained from your registration documents from labels in your vehicle or from the service center Dimensions BMW Z4 Width with mirrors inches mm 76 8 1 951 Width without mirrors inches mm 70 5 1 790 Height inches mm 50 8 1 291 Height Z4 sDrive35is inches mm 50 6 1 284 Length inches mm 166 9 4 239 Length Z4 sDrive35is inches mm 167 1 4 244 Wheelbase inches mm 98 3 2 496 Smallest turning circle dia ft m 35 1 10 7 Weights Z4 sDrive28i Z4 sDrive35i Z4 sDrive35is Approved gross vehicle weight Manual transmission los kg 3 858 1 750 264 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Technical data Reference Automatic transmission los kg 3 924 1 780 4 178 1 895 4 178 1 895 Load los kg 562 255 562 255 562 255 Approved front axle load los kg 1 742 790 1 918 870 1 918 870 Approved rear axle load lbs kg 2 227 1 010 2 293 1 040 2 293 1 040 Cargo area capacity cu ft 10 9 10 9 10 9 liters 310 310 310 Capacities Fueltank US gal liters Approx 14 5 55 Fuel recommendation refer to page 226 265 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2
41. 10 O 11 34 36 N Exit interactive map T View in northern direction Display destination Display current location Find points of interest gt Select the symbol Start guidance or Add as another destination Add a destination as a further destination refer to page 149 gt Exit interactive map return to the map view gt View in northern direction or View in driving direction gt Display destination the map section around the destination is displayed gt Display current location the map section around your current location is displayed gt Find points of interest the search for Points of Interest is started 147 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Navigation Destination entry Destination entry by voice General information gt Instructions for voice activation system re fer to page 27 gt When making a destination entry by voice you can change between voice operation and iDrive gt To have the available spoken instructions read out loud Voice commands Saying the entries gt The town city street and house number can be entered using a single command gt Countries towns and cities streets and intersections can be said as whole words or spelled in the language of the system refer to page 80 Example to enter a town city in a US states as a whole word the language of the sys tem must be English gt Spell the en
42. 15 Adjusting Controls Adjust the backrest so that the head restraint Adjusting electrically is as close as possible to the back of the head cmt X 7 Seat tilt 1 Longitudinal direction L 2 Height 3 Seat tilt Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired tilt After releasing the lever apply your weight to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat ry engages properly of Thigh support OF ee Se 4 Backrest tilt Lumbar support The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture Pull the lever and move the thigh support for ward or back N gt Press the front rear section of the switch The curvature is increased decreased 49 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Adjusting gt Press the upper lower section of the switch The curvature is shifted up down Backrest width Change the width of the backrest using the side wings to adjust the lateral support Press the front rear section of the switch The backrest width decreases increases Seat heating Press the button once for each tem perature level The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit If the trip is continued within approx 15 mi nutes the seat heating is activated automati cally with the temperature set last
43. 15 Adjusting Controls Buckling the belt Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle Unbuckling the belt 1 Hold the belt firmly 2 Press the red button in the belt buckle 3 Guide the belt back into its reel Safety belt reminder for driver and passenger fA The indicator lamp lights up and a e _ signal sounds In addition a message H A appears on the Control Display i Check whether the safety belt has been fastened correctly The safety belt reminder is active at speeds above approx 5 mph 8 km h It can also be ac tivated if objects are placed on the front pas senger seat Damage to safety belts In the case of strain caused by accidents or damage Have the safety belts including the safety belt tensioners replaced and have the belt anchors checked Checking and replacing safety belts Have the work performed only by your service center otherwise it cannot be ensured that this safety feature will function properly Seat and mirror memory General information Two different driver s seat and exterior mirror positions can be stored and retrieved for each remote control Settings for the backrest width and lumbar support are not stored Storing 1 Switch on the radio ready state or the igni tion refer to page 57 2 Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the desired positions S Press the button The LED in the button lights up 4 Press the desir
44. 15 Controls Climate gt Left LED on automatic recirculated air control a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air If necessary the system blocks the supply of outside air and recirculates the inside air As soon as the concentration of pollutants in the outside air has de creased sufficiently the system automati cally switches back to outside air supply gt Right LED on recirculated air mode the supply of outside air into the vehicle is per manently blocked The system then recir culates the air currently within the vehicle Adjusting air flow rate manually Press the left side of the button to reduce air flow Press the right side of the button to increase it The air volume may be reduced automatically to save battery power The display remains the same Air distribution manual Depending on the selected setting the air is directed to the windshield to the upper body area to the knee area and into the footwell Adjusting air distribution manually ey Press the button repeatedly until the air distribution is set as re quired The corresponding LED lights up The manual air distribution is also switched on when the AUTO program is deactivated Residual heat The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the interior This function can be switched on using the right hand button under the following conditions gt Upto 15 minutes after switching off the engine 114 V When
45. 2 954 104 II 15 CD multimedia Entertainment In fast forward reverse the speed increases every time the controller is pressed To stop start playback DVD menu 1 If necessary turn the controller to open the video menu 2 DV DVD menu The DVD menu is displayed The display depends on the contents of the DVD 3 Toselect menu items move the controller and press it To change to the video menu turn the control ler and press it DVD settings For some DVDs settings can only be made via the DVD menu refer also to the information on the DVD Selecting the language The languages that are available depend on the DVD 1 Turn the controller during playback 2 Open Options 3 Audio language G Options Close control display DVD video Audio language Subtitles Display settings Additional options CD Multimedia 4 Select the desired language Selecting the subtitles The subtitles that are available depend on the DVD 1 Turn the controller during playback 2 Open Options 3 Subtitles 4 Select the desired language or Do not display subtitles 4 GH Subtitles Do not display subtitles German English Setting the brightness contrast and color 1 Turn the controller during playback 2 Open Options 3 Display settings 4 Brightness Contrast or Color AE Display settings 6 Brightness Contrast i Color 5 Turn the controlle
46. 2 954 104 II 15 ezeli EE Displays Units of measure 3 Use button 1 to set the hours l A Pr tton 2t nfirm the entry You can change the units for fuel consumption Boole wee ee route distance temperature and pressure 5 Use button 1 to set the minutes 1 Settings 6 Press button 2 to confirm the entry 7 Pr tton 2 2 Language Units GaS URIO The system accepts the new time Settings Time Date Via the iDrive Language Units MENU v Tone 123 1 i Press the button lt gt Speed amp The main menu is displayed d i Climate j Lighting x i i Main menu j Door locks CD Multimedia 7 7 Radio 3 Select the desired menu item Telephone 4 Select the desired unit dali aliel J Office The settings are stored for the remote control i ConnectedDrive currently in use f Vehicle Info i Settings Clock Main menu Setting the time i CD Multimedia Radio In the in ument cluster Telephone To set the 12h 24h format refer to Setting the TF Navigation Office ConnectedDrive Vehicle Info Settings time format below Settings Time Date Time zone AIR A w mposa Select the desired time zone 1 Press button 1 in the turn indicator leverup The time zone is stored or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display accompa Setting the time nied by the time and the word SET p 2 Press button 2 1 Settings 2 Time Date
47. 212 Reading the text message out loud Read the text message out loud refer to page 212 My Info Selecting additional functions Additional functions are available when a mes sage is selected Sym Function bol amp Start guidance or Add as another destination D Call If the message contains a number the connection is established Ol Select phone number If the message contains more than one number select the desired number from the list The connec tion is established Message from the Concierge service Storing an address 1 Select the desired message 2 Open Options 3 Store contact in vehicle Selecting additional functions Additional functions are available when a mes sage is selected Sym Function bol amp Start guidance or Add as another destination D Call If the message contains a number the connection is established 209 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Communication Office Ol Select phone number If the message contains more than one number select the desired number from the list The connec tion is established i Further information Display additional information E mail Displaying e mails 1 Office 2 Messages 3 Select the desired e mail Displaying e mail contacts If the sender and recipient of an e mail are transmitted by the mobile phone this informa tion is displayed in the e mail a
48. 260 gt Donot place objects close to the Control Display otherwise the Control Display can be damaged Switching off Press the button 2 Close control display Ce Options O Split screen Close control display Switching on Press the controller again to switch the screen back on Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controller Press the but Function Select menu items and create settings ton 1 Turn NAV Opens the Navigation menu TEL Opens the Telephone menu BACK Displays the previous panel OPTION Opens the Options menu Operating concept Opening the main menu Press the button 2 Main menu CD Multimedia Telephone Navigation Office ConnectedDrive Vehicle Info Settings The main menu is displayed All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu Selecting menu items Menu items shown in white can be selected 1 Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted 2 Main menu CD Multimedia Press the but Function Radio ton i Telephone l Navigation MENU Opens the main menu Office RADIO Opens the Radio menu ltl Saduki Vehicle Info MEDIA Opens the CD Multimedia Settings menu Press the controller 21 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 At a glance anu ite in the ner s Manus In the Owner s Manual menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks e g
49. 954 104 II 15 Reference Short commands of the voice activation system Short commands of the voice activation system Vehicle equipment General information This chapter describes all series equipment as Instructions for voice activation system refer well as country specific and special equipment to page 27 offered for this model series Therefore it also To have the available spoken instructions read describes equipment that may not be found in out loud Voice commands your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems The following short commands apply to vehi cles equipped with a voice activation system They have no function in vehicles in which only l l the mobile phone is operated using the voice When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Adjusting Vehicle Function Command Opens the main menu Main menu Open the options Options Open the settings Settings Settings on the Control Display Control display Open the time and date gt Time and datex Open the language and units gt Language and units Open the speed limit Speeck Open the light Lighting Open the door lock Door locks 266 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Short commands of the voice activation system WROGA Vehicle information Computer Open the computer
50. DVD audio video part only DVD video Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 CD multimedia Entertainment gt CD CD ROM CD R CD RW CD DA gt Compressed audio files MP3 WMA AAC M4A Audio playback Press the button for the appropriate direction as often as necessary until the desired track is played back Bruce Springsteen Magic 00 28 FA Store in vehicle Nowhere Youll Be Comin Down Livin In The Future Select the desired track to begin playback CDs DVDs with compressed audio files Depending on the data some letters and num bers of the CD DVD may not be displayed cor rectly 1 Select the directory if necessary To change to a higher level directory move the controller to the left Santana Supernatural 00 38 Prince Santana Sportfreunde Stiller Tom Jones 2 Select the desired track to begin playback Santana Supernatural 00 08 B Store in vehicle Da Le Yaleo Africa Bamba Corazon Espinado Fe Santana Supernatural 223 249 00 35 Prince O Santana O Sportfreunde Stiller E l Tom Jones 6 If information about a track has been stored it is displayed automatically gt Artist gt Album track gt Number of tracks on the CD DVD gt File name of track 1 CD Multimedia 2 CD DVD 3 Select the desired CD or DVD 173 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Entertainment
51. Make sure to have reg ular maintenance procedures recorded in the 243 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Mobility Maintenance vehicle s Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod els These entries are proof of regular mainte nance Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis Socket for Onboard Diagnosis The socket for Onboard Diagnosis may only be used by the service center by work shops that operate according to the specifica tions of the vehicle manufacturer with appro priately trained personnel and by other authorized persons Otherwise its use may lead to vehicle malfunctions On the driver s side is an OBD socket for checking the primary components in the vehi cle emissions Emissions aoe gt The warning light lights up SOON The emissions values are deterio rating Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible gt The warning light flashes under certain cir cumstances This indicates that there is excessive mis firing in the engine Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately otherwise serious engine misfiring within a brief pe 244 riod can seriously damage emission con trol components in particular the catalytic converter Display of the previously described malfunctions on Canadian models Fuel cap aose The indicator lamp lights up If the fuel cap i
52. Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Destination guidance Navigation 3 New route for GE Route information f New route for 4 Turn the controller Enter the number of kilometers within which you would like to return to the original route 5 Press the controller Resuming the original route If the route section should no longer be by passed 1 Navigation 2 Route information 3 New route for 4 Remove blocking Gas station recommendation The remaining range is calculated and if needed gas stations along the route are dis played Even with the latest navigation data informa tion on individual Points of Interest may have changed for example gas stations might not be in operation 1 Navigation 2 Route information 3 Recommended refuel A list of the gas stations is displayed 4 Highlight a gas station The location of the gas station is displayed on the split screen 5 Select the gas station 6 Select the symbol 7 Start guidance destination guidance to the selected gas station is started Add as another destination the gas sta tion is added to the route Destination guidance through voice instructions Switching spoken instructions on off Settings are stored for the remote control cur rently in use 1 Navigation 2 Map 3 Q y Voice instructions Repeating a spoken instruction 1 Navigation 2 Map 3 y Hi
53. PETUELRING 130 DEUTSCHLAND 3 Change the entries 4 Move the controller to the left 5 Yes If a contact from the mobile phone is edited the changes are not stored on the mobile phone A copy of the entry is stored in the ve hicle and only this copy is displayed Under certain circumstances a contact entry with the same name is created Selecting the contact as a navigation destination 1 Select the desired contact 2 Select the address When contacts from the mobile phone are used the address may need to be matched to the navigation data contained in the ve hicle In this case Correct the address 3 Start guidance or Add as another destination Checking the address as a destination An address that is to be used for destination guidance must match the navigation data con tained in the vehicle The address can be checked for this purpose 1 Select the desired contact and highlight the address 2 Open Options 3 Check as destination 4 Correct and store the address if necessary If the address is corrected and stored a copy of it is stored in the vehicle The address is not changed on the mobile phone Selecting the sorting order of the names Names can be displayed in a different order 1 My contacts 2 Open Options 215 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Communication Contacts 3 Display last first name or Display first last name
54. PY24W bulb 24 watt gt Outer brake light backup light W16W bulb 16 watt 1 Turn the wheel outwards gt Inner brake light H21W bulb 21 watt 2 Turn both locks in the wheel house to the left and remove the cover Outer brake light Tail light LED Inner brake light Backup light a fh OQ N Turn signal dynamic brake light LED The lights of bulbs 2 and 5 use LED technol ogy Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs refer to page 245 3 Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove Please contact your service center in the event It of a malfunction 4 Turn the bulb to the right see arrow and remove it Changing the backup light and inner brake light 5 Change the bulb and screw it into the bulb holder toward the left Press the locking mechanism in the cargo 6 Insert the bulb holder and turn it to the area see arrow and remove the cover right 7 Reattach the cover 247 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Witeleiiiaam Replacing components brake light teplacing the outer brake light 1 Remove the cover in the cargo area Pull out the bulb holder and replace the bulb Fasten the bulb holder and attach the cover 2 Pull out the bulb holder see arrow and change the bulb 3 Attach the bulb holder Pull out the bulb holder and replace the bulb 4 Reattach the cover Fasten the bulb hold d attach th i ee Sas Rie e a License plate ligh
55. Select the type of number Home Business Mobile or Other Complete the entries if necessary 7 Store contact Hands free system General information Calls that are being made on the hands free system can be continued on the mobile phone and vice versa From the mobile phone to the hands free system Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued on the hands free system with the ignition switched on Depending on the mobile phone the system automatically switches to the hands free sys tem If the system does not switch over automati cally follow the instructions on the mobile phone display refer also to the mobile phone operating instructions From the hands free system to the mobile phone Calls that are made on the hands free system can in some cases be continued on the mobile phone this depends on the mobile phone Follow the instructions on the mobile phone display refer also to the mobile phone operat ing instructions Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Telephone Communication Snap in adapter 3 Toremove the snap in adapter press but ton 1 General information More information on compatible snap in adapters that support the functions of the mo bile phone is available at the service center Notes 7 At high temperatures the charging function of A the mobile phone may be limited and functions may not be executed W
56. Settings Changing between panels After a menu item is selected e g Radio a new panel is displayed Panels can overlap gt Move the controller to the left The current panel is closed and the previ ous panel is displayed The previous panel is opened again by pressing the BACK button In this case the current panel is not closed gt Move the controller to the right A new panel is opened on top of the previ ous display Q Manual CARIVARI ENERGY GONG96 3 KLASSIK 100 0 MHz 101 3 MHz White arrows pointing to the left or right indi cate that additional panels can be opened View of an opened menu When a menu is opened it generally opens with the panel that was last selected in that menu To display the first panel of a menu gt Move the controller to the left repeatedly until the first panel is displayed gt Press the menu button on the controller twice Opening the Options menu Press the button The Options menu is displayed 22 EY Split screen Close control display Bayern 1 Store station Additional options move the controller to the right repeatedly until the Options menu is displayed The Options menu consists of various areas gt Screen settings e g Split screen This area remains unchanged gt Control options for the selected main menu e g for Radio gt If applicable further operating options for the selected menu for instance
57. Start Stop Function The Automatic Engine Start Stop Function au tomatically switches the engine off during a stop If the engine is stopped and then started again fuel consumption and emissions drop com pared to an engine that runs permanently Stopping the engine even for just a few sec onds can result in savings Use of this system can cause premature wear on certain vehicle components In addition fuel consumption depends on other factors as well such as driving style road conditions maintenance and environmental factors Additional information on the Automatic En gine Start Stop Function refer to page 59 135 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 DOUES Things to remember when driving Switch off any functions that are not currently needed Functions such as the automatic climate con trol require a large amount of energy and con sume additional fuel especially in city and stop and go traffic Therefore switch off these functions if they are not actually needed Have maintenance carried out Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle economy and operating life Have the maintenance carried out by your service center Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys tem refer to page 243 136 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Things to remember when driving Hd La Bie 137 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Online Ed
58. Steering wheel heating Press the button 54 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Transporting children safely Controls Transporting children safely Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations The right place for children Note Children in the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle otherwise they could endanger them selves and other persons e g by opening the doors lt Children on the front passenger seat Should it be necessary to use a child restraint fixing system on the front passenger seat make sure that the front and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated Auto matic deactivation of front passenger airbags refer to page 93 Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in the front passenger seat the front passenger airbags must be deactivated otherwise there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered even with a child re straint fixing system lt Transport children
59. Transmission position P is engaged automati cally gt Automatically after approx 30 minutes gt When the remote control is removed from the ignition lock Headlights gt Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or caustic cleansers gt Soak areas that have been soiled e g due to insects with shampoo and wash off with water gt Thaw ice with de icing spray do not use an ice scraper Retractable hardtop When you open a wet hardtop water drops may run into the cargo area If necessary re move items from the cargo area beforehand to avoid water stains or soiling After washing the vehicle After washing the vehicle apply the brakes briefly to dry them otherwise braking action can be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can occur 258 Fully remove any residue from the windows to prevent obstruction of view from streaking wiping noises and wiper wear Vehicle care Car care products BMW recommends using cleaning and care products from BMW since these have been tested and approved Car care and cleaning products Follow the instructions on the container When cleaning the interior open the doors or windows Only use products intended for cleaning vehi cles Cleansers can contain substances that are dangerous and harmful to your health lt Vehicle paint Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention Environmental influences in areas with high air pollution or
60. _ CD multimedia 4 Open Options 5 Random amp Options EY Split screen Close control display CD Multimedia UR 0 O Random Music data import export CDs DVDs with compressed audio files all tracks within the selected directory are played in random order Random mode is switched off when the audio source is changed and the ignition is switched off Fast forward reverse gt Press and hold the button Video playback Country codes Only DVDs with the code of the home region can be played back also refer to the informa tion on the DVD 1 USA Canada 2 Japan Europe Middle East South Af rica 3 Southeast Asia 4 Australia Central and South America New Zealand 5 Northwest Asia North Africa 6 China 0 All regions 174 Playback The video image is displayed on the Control Display up to a speed of approx 2 mph 3 km h in some countries it is only displayed while the parking brake is set or the automatic transmis sion is in position P DVD video 1 CD Multimedia 2 CD DVD 3 Select a DVD with video content 4 BVD DVD menu maj aio 5 Start the DVD via the DVD menu Video menu To open the video menu turn the controller during playback Press the controller when Back is displayed DvO Open DVD menu gt Starting playback Pause L Stop gt Next chapter KI Previous chapter D Fast forward K4 Reverse Online Edition for Part no 01 40
61. a nontrivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law enforce ment could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely ac quired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehi cle or the EDR is needed In addition to the ve hicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Reporting safety defects For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause in jury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration NHTSA in addition to notifying BMW of North America LLC P O Box 1227 West wood New Jersey 07675 1227 Telephone 1 800 831 1117 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or BMW of North America LLC To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotl
62. a Press and hold the left button or temperature setting This function is only avail Switching the system on off with the blower at its lowest set able while the engine is running ting press the left button The The cooling function helps to prevent conden blower and air conditioner are completely sation on the windows or to remove it quickly switched off and the air supply is cut off Depending on the weather the windshield may To switch on the air conditioner set the de fog over briefly when the engine is started sired air flow rate Recirculated air mode If the air outside the car has an un pleasant odor or contains pollu 110 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Climate Controls tants shut off the supply to the interior of the car temporarily The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle The recirculated air mode can also be acti vated deactivated refer to page 14 via a but ton on the steering wheel Air volume Press the corresponding button The higher the rate the more ef fective the heating or cooling will be The air flow rate may be reduced or the blower may be switched off entirely to save on battery power Vent settings Direct the flow of air to the win i dows W to the upper body area l or to the knee area and foot well 4 Intermediate positions are possible In the 6 o clock posi tion asmall amount of air is also
63. battery 250 Distance control refer to PDC 107 Divided screen view split screen 24 Door key refer to Remote control with integrated key 32 Door lock 37 Doors manual operation 37 Doors unlocking and locking confirmation signals 36 Doors unlocking and locking from the inside 37 Doors unlocking and locking from the outside 34 DOT Quality Grades 232 Draft free ventila tion 111 115 Drive off assistant 104 Drive off assistant refer to DSC 101 Driving instructions break in 130 Driving notes general 130 Driving stability control sys tems 101 Driving tips 130 DSC Dynamic Stability Con trol 101 DTC Dynamic Traction Con trol 102 DTMF suffix dialing 200 DVD CD 172 DVDs storing 177 DVD video 174 Dynamic Brake Control DBC 101 Dynamic destination guid ance 158 Dynamic Driving Control 102 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 101 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 102 E EBV electronic brake force distribution 101 EfficientDynamics refer to Saving fuel 134 Electrical fault 7 gear auto matic transmission 71 Electrical malfunction door lock 37 Electrical malfunction driver s door 37 Electrical malfunction fuel filler flap 224 Electric seat adjustment 49 Electronic brake force distri bution 101 Electronic engine oil level check 238 Electronic Stability Program ESP refer to DSC 101 Emergency operation fuel filler flap unlocking man ually 224 Emergency Request 251 Emerge
64. be unpaired 4 Open Options 5 Remove phone from list WA S Options LY Split screen Close control display Gerat 2 Configure phone Remove phone from list Bluetooth telephone O Bluetooth audio What to do if Information on suitable mobile phones refer to page 194 The mobile phone could not be paired or con nected gt Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on the mobile phone Activate Bluetooth in the vehicle and on the mobile phone gt Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and the vehicle match Enter the same passkey on the mobile phone and via iDrive gt Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter the passkey Repeat the pairing proce dure gt Are too many Bluetooth devices con nected to the mobile phone or vehicle De lete connections with other devices if nec essary gt Is the audio connection activated Deacti vate the audio connection gt Is the mobile phone in power save mode or does it have only a limited remaining bat tery life Charge the mobile phone in the snap in adapter or via the charging cable gt Depending on the mobile phone it is pos sible that only one mobile phone can be connected to the vehicle Unpair the con nected mobile phone from the vehicle and pair and connect only one mobile phone The mobile phone no longer reacts 197 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Communication Telephone gt Swi
65. cal 48 Seat and mirror memory 51 Seat and mirror memory re trieving automatically 36 Seat Belt Reminder refer to Safety belt reminder 51 Seat belts 50 Seat heating 50 Seats 48 Seats adjusting 48 Seats adjusting electri cally 49 Seats heating 50 Seats memory refer to Seat and mirror memory 51 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Everything from A to Z Reference Seats storing the setting re fer to Seat and mirror mem ory 51 Sensors care 260 Service and warranty 8 Service requirements CBS Condition Based Serv ice 243 Service requirements dis play 80 Services remote 221 Servotronic 104 Settings and information 77 Settings clock 12h 24h mode 79 Settings configuring refer to Personal Profile 32 Settings DVD 175 Settings on Control Dis play 80 Shift paddles on steering wheel 7 gear automatic transmission 70 Shift paddles on steering wheel 8 gear automatic transmission 67 Short commands voice acti vation 266 Side airbags 92 Side windows refer to Win dows 42 Sitting safely 48 Ski bag refer to Through loading opening with integrated transport bag 121 Slot for remote control 57 Smokers package refer to Ashtray 120 Snap in adapter mobile phone 203 Snap in adapter refer to Cen ter armrest storage com partment 124 Snow chains 235 Socket OBD Onboard Diag nostics 244 Socket refer to Connecting electrical devices 120 Softw
66. call on hold is displayed in gray Swap calls The call on hold is resumed Establishing a conference call Two calls can be connected to a single tele phone conference call 1 Establish two calls 2 a Conference call 200 When terminating a conference call both calls are ended If one call is terminated by another party the other call can be continued Switching the microphone to mute When a call is active the microphone can be muted 1 Telephone 2 Active calls 3 y Microphone mute A microphone that has been switched to mute is automatically reactivated gt When anew connection is established gt When switching between call parties DTMF suffix dialing DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac cess to network services or for controlling de vices e g to make a remote inquiry of an an swering machine The DTMF code is needed for this purpose 1 Telephone 2 Select the contact from a list or Dial number 3 Keypad dialing 4 Enter the DTMF code via iDrive Phone book Displays The phone book accesses the contacts and shows all contacts for which a phone number has been stored The entries can be selected to make a call 1 Telephone 2 Phone book A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Telephone Communication a A Z search ANngi BMW Service Christoph Dr Tom M
67. calls Dial number Messages Bluetooth phone 3 Select the desired entry and the phone number if necessary The connection is established Deleting a single entry or all entries The deletion of entries depends on your par ticular mobile phone 1 Highlight the entry 2 Open Options 3 Delete entry or Delete list 201 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Communication Telephone Saving an entry in the contacts 1 Highlight the entry 2 Open Options 3 Store as new contact or Add to existing contact 4 Select the contact if necessary 5 Select the type of number Home Business Mobile or Other Complete the entries if necessary 7 Store contact Received calls Displaying calls The 20 calls that were last received are dis played 1 Telephone 2 Received calls amp Telephone Active calls Phone book f ma Redial t gt V Received calls Ta Dial number Messages Bluetooth phone Calling a number from the list Selecting an entry The connection is established Deleting a single entry or all entries The deletion of entries depends on your par ticular mobile phone 1 Highlight the entry 2 Open Options 3 Delete entry or Delete list 202 Saving an entry in the contacts 1 Highlight the entry 2 Open Options 3 Store as new contact or Add to existing contact 4 Select the contact if necessary 5
68. card integrated in the vehicle is activated gt ConnectedDrive subscription is available Only press the SOS button in an emergency Emergency Request not guaranteed For technical reasons the Emergency Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor able conditions lt Initiating an Emergency Request 1 Briefly press the cover flap to open el 2 Press the SOS button until the LED in the button lights up gt The LED lights up an Emergency Request was initiated If the situation allows wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been estab lished gt The LED flashes if the connection to the BMW Response Center has been estab lished Once the BMW Response Center has re ceived your Emergency Request the BMW Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you Even if you are unable to respond the BMW Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circum stances For this purpose data that are used to de termine the necessary rescue measures such as the current position of the vehicle if it can be established are transmitted to the BMW Response Center 251 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Mobility Breakdown assistance gt Ifthe LED is flashing but the BMW Re Check the expiration dates of the contents sponse Center cannot be heard on the regularly and replace any items promptly hands free system the hands free system
69. care 260 Car phone installation loca tion refer to Center arm rest 124 Car phone refer to Tele phone 194 Car vacuum cleaner connect ing refer to Connecting electrical devices 120 Car wash 257 Car wash with Comfort Ac cess 40 275 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Reference Everything from A to Z Catalytic converter refer to Hot exhaust system 131 CBS Condition Based Serv ice 243 CD DVD 172 CD notes 176 CDs storing 177 Center armrest 124 Center brake light bulb re placement 248 Central locking Comfort Ac cess 39 Central locking from the in side 37 Central locking setting the unlocking characteristics 34 Central locking system from the outside 33 Central locking system prin ciple 33 Central screen refer to Con trol Display 20 Changes technical refer to Safety 7 Changing wheels tires 234 Chassis number refer to En gine compartment 237 Check Control 84 Children transporting safely 55 Child restraint system 55 Child seats refer to Trans porting children safely 55 Chrome parts care 259 Cigarette lighter refer to Lighter 120 Circulation of air refer to Re circulated air mode 110 113 Cleaning displays 260 Cleaning your BMW refer to Care 257 Clock 73 Clock 12h 24h format 79 Clock setting the time and date 78 276 Clock setting the time zone 8 Closing from the inside 37 Closing from the outside 34 Cockpit 14 Cold
70. closed original container and inaccessible to children Follow the notes and instructions on the con tainer United States The washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U S EPA and many individual states do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratios limits that apply Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid con tainer Use BMW s Windshield Washer Con centrate or the equivalent Washer fluid reservoir Adding washer fluid Only add washer fluid when the engine is cool and then close the cover completely to avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot engine parts Otherwise there is the danger of fire and a risk to personal safety if the fluid is spilled lt All washer nozzles are supplied from one res ervoir The recommended minimum filling quantity is 0 2 US gal 1 liter Fill with a mixture of window washing concen trate and tap water if needed add antifreeze according to the manufacturer instructions Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain the correct mixing ratio Do not fill in undiluted window washing con centrate and antifreeze and do not fill in pure water this could damage the washer system Do not mix window washing concentrate from different manufacturers this could cause the washer nozzles to clog Manual transmission Pay attention to the shift plane When shifting into 5th or 6th gear push the gearshift lever to the right otherwise inad ve
71. command appears on the Control Dis play wt The symbol on the Control Display indi cates that the voice activation system is active If no other commands are available operate the function via iDrive in this case Terminating the voice activation system _ Gs Briefly press the button on the steer ing wheel or gt Cancek Possible commands Most menu items on the Control Display can be voiced as commands The available commands depend on the menu that is currently displayed on the Control Dis play The functions of the main menu have short commands Some list items such as the phone book en tries can also be selected via the voice activa tion system Say the list items exactly as they are displayed on the list Having possible commands read aloud You can have the system read possible com mands aloud Voice commands 2 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Ataglance Emelrlae mm Voice activation system For example if the Settings menu is dis played the commands for the settings are read out loud Executing functions using short commands Functions on the main menu can be performed directly by means of short commands usually irrespective of which menu item is currently selected for instance Vehicle status List of short commands of the voice activation system refer to page 266 Help dialog for the voice activation system Calling up help dialog H
72. compartment level is correct if it is between the arrows see the label on the reservoir 2 4 Ifthe coolant is low slowly add coolant up to the specified level do not overfill 5 Turn the cap until there is an audible click 6 Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi nated as soon as possible Disposal Comply with the appropriate environ mental protection regulations when dis posing of coolant additives 242 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Maintenance Mobility Maintenance Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations BMW Maintenance System ES Vehicle status Y W E23 y taf Service required The maintenance system provides information on required maintenance measures and thus provides support in maintaining road safety and the operational reliability of the vehicle Service scopes and intervals may vary with the country version Replacement work spare parts fuels and lubricants and wear materials are calculated separately Additional informa tion can be obtained from the
73. contents could present a source of danger to the pas sengers for example during braking or evasive maneuvers lt 2 In the cargo area press the handle up and fold the cover down After loading secure the transport bag and its contents Tighten the retaining strap on the tensioning buckle for this purpose To store the transport bag perform the steps described for loading in reverse order 3 Undo the fastener and spread out the Ski support transport bag between the seats p g Always secure skis 4 Insert the latch plate of the retaining strap into the belt buckle under the transport bag Always secure transported skis or similar objects with the ski support as they could oth erwise endanger occupants during braking maneuvers and swerving 1 Remove both covers 1 with the screw driver 5 Load the transport bag The zipper eases access to the stored items Only place clean skis in the transport bag Wrap sharp edges to prevent damage oa 2 Attach the ski support 2 and fold it down see arrow 122 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Interior equipment 3 Pull the fastener up and attach the rear of the ski Prevent damage to the trunk lid Before closing the trunk ensure that the trunk lid cannot be damaged by the skis Removing the transport bag The transport bag can be completely removed e g for faster drying or to allow you to us
74. directed to ward the windows to keep them from fogging over Defrosting windows and removing condensation 1 2 3 4 6 5 1 Air distribution 1 in position W 2 Deactivate recirculated air mode 2 3 Switch on cooling function 3 Temperature 4 to the right red 5 Set the air flow rate 5 to the maximum level 6 Switch on the rear window defroster 6 to defrost the rear window G Rear window defroster Sy The defroster switches off auto matically after a certain time or when the hardtop is opened Microfilter The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the incoming air The microfilter is changed by your service center during routine mainte nance work Ventilation 20096 _ 1 Use the lever to change the direction of the air flow 2 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open and close the air vents Ventilation for cooling Adjust the vents to direct the flow of cool air in your direction for instance if the interior has become too warm Draft free ventilation Adjust the vents to let the air flow past you Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Climate Automatic climate control Ss A amp 1 Temperature left side of passenger com partment 2 Maximum cooling 3 Rear window defroster 4 Defrosting windows and removing conden sation 5 Automatic recirculated air control recircu lated air mode Note Sufficient ventilation When remaining in
75. display on the Control Dis play and in the instrument cluster gt 12h 24h clock format refer to page 78 gt Date format refer to page 79 Brightness of the Control Display refer to page 80 gt Language on the Control Display refer to page 80 gt Split screen refer to page 24 gt Units of measure for fuel consumption distance covered remaining distances and temperature refer to page 78 gt Volume of PDC Park Distance Control re fer to page 108 gt Light settings gt Welcome lights refer to page 87 gt Headlight courtesy delay feature refer to page 88 gt Daytime running lights refer to page 88 gt High beam Assistant refer to page 89 gt Automatic climate control AUTO program cooling function and automatic recircu lated air control activated deactivated temperature air flow rate and air distribu tion refer to page 112 gt Navigation gt Voice activation refer to page 153 gt Map view settings refer to page 155 gt Route criteria refer to page 151 gt Entertainment gt Tone control refer to page 162 gt Radio stored stations refer to page 1 70 gt CD multimedia audio source listened to last refer to page 172 gt Telephone gt Volume refer to page 198 Central locking system The concept The central locking system becomes active when the driver s door is closed The system simultaneously engages and re leases the locks
76. during the spoken in structions until the desired volume is set Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Voice activation system Ataglance a glance gt The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed gt The volume is stored for the remote con trol currently in use Notes on Emergency Requests Do not use the voice activation system to ini tiate an Emergency Request In stressful situa tions the voice and vocal pitch can change This can unnecessarily delay the establish ment of a telephone connection Instead use the SOS button refer to page 251 in the vicinity of the interior mirror Environmental conditions gt Say the commands numbers and letters smoothly and with normal volume empha sis and speed gt Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system gt Keep the doors windows and retractable hardtop closed to prevent noise interfer ence gt Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking 29 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls This chapter is intended to provide you with information that will give you complete control of your vehicle All features and accessories that are useful for driving and your safety comfort and convenience are described here Controls Opening and closing Opening and closing Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all ser
77. engine is running Before closing the retractable hardtop remove all foreign objects from the windshield frame as these could prevent the hardtop from clos ing properly a 1 Press and hold button 1 The retractable hardtop closes 2 Press and hold button 2 The retractable hardtop opens 3 LEDs The side windows move down when the hard top is opened or closed If the windows pause briefly as they move this is for technical reasons and is not a malfunc tion Operation while driving The hardtop can be opened or closed at vehi cle speeds up to approx 25 mph 40 km h The procedure stops if the vehicle speed ex ceeds approx 25 mph 40 km h Operation while driving When operating the hardtop while driv ing pay extra attention to the traffic to avoid an accident If possible do not move the hardtop while driving in reverse because your view to the rear is severely limited during the proce dure Do not drive faster than 25 mph 40 km h or else damage to the vehicle may occur Do not operate the hardtop while the vehicle is moving through curves on uneven road surfa ces or in wind lt LEDs In the following situations a message appears on the Control Display or an acoustic signal sounds in addition to the LED lighting up gt While the hardtop is being operated the green LED lights up It goes out as soon as the top is fully opened or closed gt Ifthe red LED flashes when you release the
78. equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Important features in the engine compartment 1 Coolant expansion tank 241 5 Engine oil filler neck 240 2 Starting aid terminal negative termi 6 Starting aid terminal positive termi nal 252 nal 252 3 Vehicle identification number 4 Filler neck for washer fluid for the head lamp and window washer system 65 237 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Mobility Engine compartment Hood Opening the hood Working in the engine compartment Never attempt to perform any service or repair operations on your vehicle without the necessary professional technical training If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide lines have any work on the vehicle performed only by a service center If this work is not carried out properly there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards To avoid damage make sure that the wiper arms are resting against the wind shield before you open the engine compart ment Do not open the engine hood before the engine has cooled down otherwise injuries may result 1 Pull the lever 2 Push the release lever to the right and open the hood 238 Danger of injury when the hood is open There is a dang
79. flat tire Initialization is started by confirming the inflation pressures Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains 1 Vehicle Info 2 Vehicle status 3 Q Reset 4 Start the engine do not drive away 5 Start the initialization with Reset 6 Drive away The initialization is completed while driving which can be interrupted at any time The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes Indication of a flat tire C The warning lights come on in yellow 1 and red A message appears on the Y Control Display In addition a signal sounds There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure 1 Reduce your speed and stop cautiously Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers 2 Check whether the vehicle is fitted with regular tires or run flat tires Run flat tires refer to page 234 are la beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall Do not continue driving without run flat tires Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run flat tires continued driving may result in serious accidents lt When a flat tire is indicated DSC Dynamic Sta bility Control is switched on if necessary Actions in the event of a flat tire Normal tires 1 Identify the damaged tire Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct
80. front AUX active Volume BPPRPe 5 Turn the controller until the desired volume is set and press the controller USB audio interface music interface for smartphones At a glance It is possible to connect external audio devices They can be operated via iDrive The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers Connectors for external devices gt Connection via USB audio interface Apple iPod iPhone USB devices e g MP3 play ers USB flash drives or mobile phones that are supported by the USB audio inter face gt Connection via snap in adapter refer to page 203 when equipped with the music interface for smartphones Apple iPhone or mobile phones Playback is only possible if no audio device is connected to the analog AUX IN port Due to the large number of different audio de vices available on the market it cannot be en sured that every audio device mobile phone is operable on the vehicle Ask your service center about suitable audio devices mobile phones Audio files Standard audio files can be played back gt MPs WMA WAV PCM AAC M4A Playback lists M3U WPL PLS VV VV File system Standard file systems for USB devices are supported The FAT 32 format is recom mended 183 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Entertainment _ CD multimedia Connecting A The USB audio interface is in the center arm rest Connection of Apple iPod
81. gear gt Shortly before the vehicle slows down to below the minimum speed of the gear cur rently engaged the transmission automati cally shifts down without requiring your in tervention Shifting down rapidly even in manual mode you can skip several gears to achieve optimal acceleration Do so by pressing the accelerator past the resistance point Changing to Drive mode Push the selector lever to the right Shifting gears via the selector lever In manual mode gt To shift up pull back the selector lever gt To shift down push it forward Shifting gears using the shift paddles on the steering wheel The shift paddles allow you to shift gears with out taking your hands off the steering wheel You do not need to raise your foot from the ac celerator when doing so Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Driving Controls gt Shift up pull right shift paddle gt Shift down pull left shift paddle Gears can be shifted using the shift paddles in Drive mode or in manual mode Gear change in manual mode When manual mode is active refer to page 70 gears can be changed using the shift paddles or the selector lever Gear change in Drive mode The shift paddles can be used to change gears in Drive mode as well Afterwards if the shift paddles are not used for some time and vehicle acceleration is insuffi cient the forward gears are changed again au tomatically L
82. iPhone via USB audio interface Connect using a flexible adapter cable Connect the Apple iPod iPhone to the USB in terface The Apple iPod iPhone menu structure is sup ported by the USB audio interface Connection of a USB device via the USB audio interface Connect using a flexible adapter cable to pro tect the USB audio interface and the USB de vice against physical damage Connect the USB device to the USB interface After connecting for the first time Information on all music tracks e g artist or type of music as well as playback lists are transmitted into the vehicle This may take some time depending on the USB device and the number of tracks During transmission the tracks can be called up via the file directory Number of tracks Information from up to four USB devices or for approx 36 000 tracks can be stored in the ve hicle If a fifth device is connected or if more than 36 000 tracks are stored information on existing tracks may be deleted 184 Copy protection Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Management DRM cannot be played Playback 1 CD Multimedia 2 External devices 3 Select the or amp symbol GF External devices t JUKEBOX lt Handy Gerat AUX front The playback starts with the first track The CD cover belonging to the track may ap pear on the Control Display after several sec onds Track search Selection is possible via g
83. ignition lock refer to page 57 Switching off the engine in cars with Sport automatic transmission When the engine is switched off transmission position P is engaged automatically unless N is engaged and the remote control is inserted in the ignition lock Driving into an automatic car wash with a Sport automatic transmission To make it possible for the vehicle to roll such as in an automatic car wash follow the instruc tions in Car washes refer to page 257 Malfunction The Comfort Access functions can be distur bed by local radio waves such as by a mobile phone in the immediate vicinity of the remote control or when a mobile phone is being charged in the vehicle If this occurs open or close the vehicle using the buttons on the remote control or use the integrated key in the door lock To start the engine afterward insert the re mote control into the ignition switch Warning lights gi The warning light in the instrument j 7 cluster lights up when you attempt to start the engine the engine cannot be started The remote control is not inside the vehicle or is malfunctioning Take the remote control with you inside the vehicle or have it checked If necessary insert another remote control into the ignition switch j j i J i J 1 i J i 1 f j 4 L The warning light in the instrument cluster lights up while the engine is running the remote control is no lon ger inside the
84. in suitable child re straint fixing systems Only transport children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft 150 cm in child re straint fixing systems suitable for the age weight and size of the child otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in an accident Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a Suitable child restraint fixing system can no longer be used due to their age weight and size Installing child restraint fixing systems Notes Manufacturer s information for child re straint fixing systems To select mount and use child restraint fixing systems observe the information provided by the system manufacturer otherwise the pro tective effect can be impaired lt Standard child restraint systems are designed to be secured with a lap belt or with the lap belt section of a lap and shoulder belt Incor rectly or improperly installed child restraint systems can increase the risk of injury to chil dren Always follow the installation instructions for the system with the greatest care On the front passenger seat Check the deactivation of the passenger airbag After installing a child restraint fixing system on the passenger seat make sure that the front and side airbags on the passenger side have been deactivated otherwise there is an increased risk of injury when the airbags are deployed lt 995 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Cont
85. is displayed with a delay gt Check the e mail settings on the telephone and adjust if necessary If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available please contact the hotline or service center 213 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Communication Contacts Contacts Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Note Equipment version without the mobile phone preparation package General information Contacts can be created and edited The con tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as well if this function is supported by the mobile phone The addresses can be adopted as des tinations for navigation and the phone num bers can be dialed New contact 1 Contacts 2 New contact I amp Contacts v New contact My contacts 214 3 The entry fields are still filled with the pre vious entries Delete input fields 4 Fillin the entry fields select the symbol next to the entry field w amp F New contact Delete input fields Store con
86. major loss in tire in flation pressure gt The system was not reset The system therefore issues warnings in case of devia tions from the tire inflation pressures stored last 1 Reduce your speed and stop cautiously Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers 2 Check whether the vehicle is fitted with regular tires or run flat tires Run flat tires refer to page 98 are la beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall Do not continue driving without run flat tires Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run flat tires continued driving may result in serious accidents lt When a flat tire is indicated DSC Dynamic Sta bility Control is switched on if necessary Actions in the event of a flat tire Normal tires 1 Identify the damaged tire Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset Reset the system If an identification is not possible please contact the service center 2 Rectify the flat tire The use of tire sealant can damage the TPM electronics In this case have the 98 electronics checked at the next opportu nity and have them replaced if necessary Run flat tires You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph 80 km h Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to driv
87. ment The TeleService data is transmitted dur ing a Service Request If possible your service partner will establish contact with you Starting a Service Request 1 BMW Assist or ConnectedDrive 2 Service Request 3 Start service A Service Request can be started via a Check Control message refer to page 84 Automatic Service Request The TeleService data necessary for servicing the vehicle are automatically sent to your serv ice partner prior to the service deadline If pos sible the service partner will contact you and a service appointment can be arranged 219 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Communication ConnectedDrive To check when your service partner was noti fied 1 Vehicle Info 2 Vehicle status 1E Vehicle Info Onboard info v Trip computer Vehicle status 3 Open Options 4 Last Service Request TeleService Report Transmits technical data when needed from your vehicle to BMW at regular intervals these are evaluated for the continued development of BMW products TeleService Report is activated in vehicles that meet certain technical conditions and that have a current ConnectedDrive subscription it is free of charge Neither personal nor position data are trans mitted To check when your service partner was noti fied Vehicle Info Vehicle status Options ow hy Last Teleservice Info Services status Displaying availab
88. natural contami nants such as tree resin or pollen can have an impact on the vehicle paint Tailor the fre quency and extent of your car care to these in fluences Immediately remove aggressive substances such as spilled fuel oil grease or bird drop pings to prevent damage to or discoloration of the paintwork Leather care Remove dust from the leather often using a cloth or vacuum cleaner Otherwise particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds and lead to increased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface To guard against discoloration such as from clothing provide leather care roughly every two months Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Care Mobility Clean light colored leather more frequently as dust and dirt are more noticeable Use leather care products otherwise dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface Suitable care products are available from the service center Upholstery material care Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner If they are very dirty e g beverage stains use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suita ble interior cleaner Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions Avoid rubbing the material vigorously Damage from Velcro fasteners Open Velcro fasteners on pants or other articles of clothing can damage the seat covers Ensure that any Vel
89. on the following gt Doors 33 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Opening and closing gt Trunk lid gt Fuel filler flap gt Center armrest Operating from the outside gt Via the remote control gt Via the driver s door lock gt In cars with Comfort Access via the door handles on the driver s and front passen ger sides The following takes place simultaneously when locking unlocking the vehicle via the re mote control gt The welcome lamps interior lamps and courtesy lamps are switched on and off gt The alarm system is armed or disarmed refer to page 41 Operating from the inside Via the button for the central locking system If the vehicle is locked from the inside the fuel filler flap remains unlocked If an accident of a certain severity occurs the central locking system unlocks automatically The hazard warning system and interior lamps come on 34 Opening and closing from the outside Using the remote control General information Take the remote control with you People or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in side Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside lt Conditions for operating the retractable hard top using the remote control gt The doors and trunk lid are closed gt The cargo area partit
90. requiring the use of a tether strap can be properly se cured in the vehicle Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Driving Controls Driving Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Ignition lock Insert the remote control into the ignition lock Insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock gt Radio ready state is switched on Individual electrical consumers can operate Comfort Access If the car is equipped with Comfort Access the remote control only needs to be inserted in the ignition lock under special circumstances refer to page 40 Removing the remote control from the ignition lock Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of the ignition lock Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of the ignition lock as this may cause damage Before removing the remote control push it all the way in to release the locking mechanism gt The ignition is switched off if it was on Sport automatic transmission When the remote control is removed from the ignition lock transmi
91. switch the opening or closing action has not yet finished gt Ifthe red LED lights up when the switch is pressed the cargo area partition is folded up the trunk lid is not closed the vehicle is standing on a strong incline or there is a malfunction The retractable hardtop can not be moved Interruption The automatic sequence of movements is in terrupted if the switch for hardtop operation is released The sequence can be continued in 45 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Opening and closing the desired direction by pushing or pulling the switch Always open or close the hardtop fully Open or close the hardtop fully other wise there is a risk of injury or damage when driving Do not interrupt and resume the clos ing procedure several times in close succes sion as this could damage the mechanism lt If the hardtop is not fully opened or closed the trunk lid cannot be opened and the windows cannot be moved Convenient operation via the remote control Information on convenient operation refer to page 35 Wind deflector The wind deflector keeps air movements in the passenger compartment to a minimum when the hardtop is open and provides an even more comfortable ride particularly at high speeds Installation 1 Insert the wind deflector 1 into the holders 2 on the rollover bars the arrow should point in the direction of travel 21 6 2 46 2 Push the
92. the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized In this case initialize the system 95 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Safety If an identification is not possible please contact the service center 2 Rectify the flat tire Run flat tires You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph 80 km h Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire 1 Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers 2 Donot exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h 3 Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized In this case initialize the system Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load and the driving style and conditions For a vehicle containing an average load the possible driving distance is approx 50 miles 80 km When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire its handling characteristics change e g re duced lane stability during braking a longer braking distance and altered self steering properties Adjust your driving style accord ingly Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv ing over obstacles e g curbs potholes etc Because the possible driving distance de pe
93. the engine is warm With sufficient battery voltage At an external temperature under 77 Fi25 G The middle LED is lit when the function is on Defrosting and defogging windows N Quickly removes ice and conden sation from the windshield and front side windows For this purpose also switch on the cooling function Rear window defroster Sy The defroster switches off auto matically after a certain time or when the hardtop is opened Microfilter activated charcoal filter The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the in coming air The activated charcoal filter pro vides additional protection by filtering gaseous pollutants from the outside air Your service center replaces this combined filter during rou tine maintenance Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Climate Controls Ventilation air flow 2 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open and close the air vents 3 Thumbwheel for adjusting the temperature for the upper body area The interior tem perature setting for the driver and passen ger does not change Ventilation for cooling Adjust the vents to direct the flow of cool air in your direction for instance if the interior has become too warm Draft free ventilation Adjust the vents to let the air flow past you 115 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Interior equipment Interior equipment Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all s
94. the keyword A list of the Points of Interest is displayed 9 Select a special destination Details are displayed If multiple details are stored you can leaf through the pages If a phone number is available a connec tion can be established if necessary 10 Select the symbol 11 Start guidance or Add as another destination 146 Add a destination as a further destination refer to page 149 Start search if a search term is not entered the search is repeated with the previous search term Category search 1 Category search 2 Town City 3 Select or enter the town city 4 Category 5 Select the category 6 Category details For some Points of Interest multiple cate gory details can be selected Move the controller to the left to leave the category details 7 Start search A list of the Points of Interest is displayed 8 Select a special destination Details are displayed If multiple details are stored you can leaf through the pages If a phone number is available a connec tion can be established if necessary 9 Select the symbol 10 Start guidance or Add as another destination Add a destination as a further destination refer to page 149 Display of Points of Interest List of Points of Interest Points of Interest are arranged by distance and appear with a direc tional arrow pointing to the special destination In the splitscreen Points of Interest of t
95. the life of the engine Some oil types are not available in all coun tries Approved oil types Specification BMW High Performance SAE 5W 30 BMW Longlife 01 BMW Longlife 01 FE Further information on approved oil types can be obtained from the service center Alternative oil types If the approved engine oils are not available up to 1 US quart liter of an oil with the following specification can be used Specification API SM or a higher quality standard Oil change The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends having the engine oil changed by a service center BMW recommends Original BMW Engine Oil Coolant General information Danger of burns from hot engine Do not open the cooling system while the engine is hot otherwise escaping coolant may cause burns Suitable additives Only use suitable additives otherwise engine damage may occur The additives are harmful to your health Coolant consists of water and additives Not all commercially available additives are suitable for your vehicle Ask your service cen ter for suitable additives Checking the coolant level 1 Let the engine cool 2 Turn the expansion tank cap counterclock wise slightly to allow any accumulated pressure to escape then continue turning to open 3 The filling level indicator 1 in the filler neck indicates the coolant level The coolant 241 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Engine
96. the vehicle for an ex tended period of time ensure sufficient exter nal ventilation Do not continuously use recir culated air mode otherwise the air quality in the interior continuously worsens lt Comfortable interior climate For almost all conditions the AUTO program 7 offers the optimum air distribution and air flow rate refer to AUTO programs below Select a comfortable interior temperature only The following sections contain more detailed information on the available setting options Most of these settings are stored for the re mote control currently in use Personal Profile settings refer to page 33 112 Manual air distribution AUTO program Air flow rate manual climate level O ON O Temperature right side of passenger com partment 10 Switching cooling function on off manually Climate control functions in detail Switching the system on off Press and hold the left button or with the blower at its lowest setting press the left but ton to switch off the automatic climate control completely All displays are cleared except for the rear window defroster if it is switched on Press any button except the rear window de froster to reactivate the automatic climate con trol Temperature r vidually for the driver s and pas F senger sides lt The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possi ble regardless of the season using maximum cooling or heat
97. the vehicle to be started has a diesel en gine let the engine of the assisting vehicle run for approx 10 minutes 2 Start the engine of the vehicle being started in the usual way If the first starting attempt is not success ful wait a few minutes before making an other attempt in order to allow the dis charged battery to recharge 3 Let both engines run for several minutes 4 Disconnect the jumper cables in the re verse order Check the battery and recharge if necessary Tow starting and towing Sport automatic transmission transporting your vehicle Note Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed Therefore contact a service center in the event of a breakdown Observe in the event of a breakdown Have the vehicle transported on a load ing platform only or damage may occur lt 253 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Mobility Breakdown assistance Tow truck Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts otherwise damage may result lt Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for maneuvering the vehicle only 7 gear Sport automatic transmission Vehicles with a 7 gear Sport automatic trans mission with a dual clutch can be towed for short distances if the following instructions are adhered to Manually release the transmission lock refer to page 71 Manually release the transmission lock Manually release th
98. trunk Cargo area showing a line indicating the maximum height gt Rubber band for securing light objects gt Do not use force to push down the cargo gt Storage compartment area partition The retractable hardtop can only be opened if the cargo area partition is in its lowermost po sition and engaged on both sides Through loading opening with integrated transport bag aN a aaa Always secure skis To open turn the lock to the left see arrow Always secure transported skis or similar 1 oe and fold the cover up objects with the ski support as they could oth erwise endanger occupants during braking Enlarging the cargo area capacity maneuvers and swerving lt The transport bag lets you transport up to two pairs of standard skis safely and cleanly With the transport bag you can stow skis up to a length of 5 4 ft 1 70 m When stowing skis with a length of 5 4 ft 1 70 m the capacity of the transport bag is reduced as the bag nar rows pul F j f ife i lt f i ra N a 2 A ra iaei p pi aN 5 7 J r __ A e 4 t a a H The cargo area capacity can be enlarged when the hardtop is closed To do so press the cargo area partition 1 up ward 121 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Interior equipment Loading Securing cargo 1 Fold the cover down Securing the transport bag Secure the transport bag by tightening the retaining strap otherwise the
99. vehicle Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Opening and closing Controls After the engine is switched off the engine can only be restarted within approx 10 seconds j The indicator lamp in the instrument e cluster comes on and a message ap pears on the Control Display replace the remote control battery Replacing the battery The remote control for Comfort Access con tains a battery that will need to be replaced from time to time 1 Take the integrated key out of the remote control refer to page 32 2 Remove the cover 3 Insert a battery of the same type with the positive side facing upwards 4 Press on the cover to close it Return used battery to a recycling center or to your service center Alarm system The concept The vehicle alarm system responds to gt Opening of a door the hood or the trunk lid gt Movements inside the vehicle Interior mo tion sensor refer to page 42 gt When the car s inclination changes for in stance if an attempt is made to jack it up and steal the wheels or to raise it prior to towing away gt Interruptions in battery voltage The alarm system signals unauthorized entry attempts for a short time by means of gt By sounding an acoustic alarm gt By switching on the hazard warning sys tem gt By flashing the high beams Arming and disarming the alarm system When you lock or unlock the vehicle either wi
100. vehicle is located within wireless net work coverage Starting BMW Online 1 BMW Assist or ConnectedDrive 2 BMW Online ConnectedDrive BMW Assist Concierge Messages Roadside Assistance BMW Online Customer Relations Service Request 3 If necessary OK The BMW Online home page is displayed Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 ConnectedDrive Communication Operating BMW Online To start a search gt Turn the controller to highlight an element gt Press the controller to display an element Opening the start page 1 Open Options 2 Display start page Options Close control display Current page Display start page Reload Cancel loading BMW Online Loading a new page 1 Open Options 2 Reload Cancel 1 Open Options 2 Cancel loading Customer Relations At a glance Contact Customer Relations for information on all aspects of your vehicle Calling Customer Relations Vehicle not equipped with TeleService 1 BMW Assist or ConnectedDrive 2 Customer Relations The Customer Relations phone number is dis played If the mobile phone is paired a connec tion is established to Customer Relations Vehicle equipped with TeleService 1 BMW Assist or ConnectedDrive 2 Customer Relations 3 Start service Service Request At a glance Sends information to your service partner to request the arrangement of a service appoint
101. wind deflector down arrow 1 and then push down and forward simultane ously arrow 2 until it engages Attach the wind deflector securely The wind deflector must engage firmly otherwise it could become detached at higher vehicle speeds Removing 1 Push the wind deflector down and back si multaneously arrow 1 to disengage it from the catch mechanism 2 Pull the wind deflector upward out of the holders arrow 2 Clothes hooks Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Opening and closing Controls Coat hooks 1 are located on the wind deflector panels in the rollover bars Only hang light objects on the hooks Do not hang heavy objects on the hooks otherwise they could endanger the passen gers such as during braking or evasive maneu vers Storage 1 0 KA f 2 V j f pOT f gt Fold the wind deflector 1 and slide it into the storage pouch 2 The wind deflector can be stored on the rear storage shelf behind the seats 47 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Adjusting Adjusting Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and sys
102. 104 II 15 Cockpit Ataglance a glance A Opening and closing front win dows 43 D Exterior mirrors folding in and out 52 Adjust the exterior mirrors Automatic Curb Monitor 52 Parking lights 87 Low beams 87 tHE UO Automatic headlight con trol 88 Adaptive Light Control 88 High beam Assistant 89 Wi G Turn signal 62 High beams head light flasher 89 High beam Assistant 89 Roadside parking lights 89 RG OS Computer 75 vV w ap Settings and information about the vehicle 77 Instrument cluster 16 Buttons on the steering wheel Change the radio station Select a music track Leaf through the phone book and through lists with stored phone numbers Next entertainment source Recirculated air mode 113 d O aah dap Windshield wipers 63 Rain sensor 63 11 START Start stop the engine and switch STOP ee yvgn the ignition on off 57 12 Ignition lock 57 Steering wheel heating 54 N 14 Horn the entire surface 15 Adjust the steering wheel 54 16 Cruise control 105 3 17 U uttons on the steering wheel Telephone 194 lt O D EN Activate deactivate the voice acti vation system 27 gt 18 Releasing the hood 238 19 Open the trunk lid 38 15 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Ataglance Fe Melrlala mm Cockpit Instrument cluster 60 100 a 4 400 20 140 A 80 M3 Be El
103. 2 954 104 II 15 Mobility Fuel recommendation Fuel recommendation Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Gasoline For the best fuel economy the gasoline should be sulfur free or very low in sulfur content Do not use fuels that are labeled at the fuel pump as containing metals Only refuel with lead free gasoline with out metal additives Do not refuel with leaded gasoline or gasoline with metal additives e g manganese or iron otherwise the catalytic converter and other components will be permanently damaged Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 10 i e E10 may be used for refueling The ethanol should fulfill the following quality standards US ASTM 4806 xx CAN CGSB 3 511 xx xx always adhere to the currently applicable standard Do not refuel with ethanol E85 Do not refuel with E85 i e fuel with an ethanol content of 85 or with Flex Fuel as this would damage the engine and fuel supply system 226 The engine is knock controlled Therefore you can refuel with different reco
104. 5 Air outlets refer to Air vents 109 274 Air pressure refer to Tire in flation pressure 228 Air supply air condi tioner 110 Air supply automatic climate control 112 Air supply ventila tion 111 115 Air vents 109 Air vents refer to Ventila tion 111 115 Alarm system 41 Alarm system avoiding unin tentional alarms 42 Alarm system ending an alarm 41 Alarm system interior motion sensor 42 Alarm system tilt alarm sen sor 42 All around the headliner 19 All season tires refer to Win ter tires 235 Alternating code hand held transmitter 117 Alternative oil types 240 AM FM station 164 Announcement navigation see Spoken instruc tions 153 Antifreeze coolant 241 Antifreeze washer fluid 65 Antilock Brake System ABS 101 Anti slip control refer to DSC 101 Anti theft protection 34 Anti theft protection lug bolts 249 Appointments 210 Approved axle loads refer to Weights 264 Approved engine oils 240 Approved gross vehicle weight refer to Weights 264 Armrest refer to Center arm rest 124 Arrival time refer to Com puter 75 Ashtray 120 Assistance systems refer to Driving stability control sys tems 101 Assistance when driving off 104 Audio device external 125 Audio playback 173 Audio playback Blue tooth 185 Automatic air distribu tion 113 Automatic air flow 113 Automatic car wash 257 Automatic climate con trol 112 Automatic climate control automatic
105. 54 104 II 15 Navigation Destination entry Select the letters Change to the list of street names Highlight the street Select the street Oo oND Starting destination guidance after entering the destination 1 Accept destination 2 Start guidance or Add as another destination Add refer to page 149 a destination as a further destination Address book Create contacts refer to page 214 Selecting a destination from the address book 1 Navigation 2 Address book Contacts with addresses are displayed if these addresses have been checked as destinations in the contacts If the contacts with addresses from the mobile phone are not displayed they first need to be checked as destinations refer to page 215 EER EMELE Enter address v Address book Last destinations Points of Interest Map Stored trips Route information 3 Select a contact in the list or if desired with A Z search 4 Business address or Home address 144 Storing the destination in the address book After entering the destination store the desti nation in the address book Navigation Map Guidance Open Options a lS Store as new contact or Add to existing contact IIG Options FY Split screen Close control display Enter address Store as new contact Add to existing contact BMW Assist destination entry Navigation Select an existing contact if available 7 Bus
106. 6 2 5 36 Rear 255 30 R 19 91 Y XL RSC 2 9 42 2 9 42 229 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Mobility Wheels and tires Tire size Pressure specifications in bar PSI With Sport Package 225 45 R 1791 W RSC 2 5 36 3 0 44 2 5 36 3 0 44 225 45 R 17 91 H M S RSC 225 45 R 17 94 V M S XL RSC Front 225 45 R 17 91 W RSC 2 5 36 2 5 36 Rear 255 40 R 17 94 W RSC 2 7139 2 7139 Front 225 40 R 18 88 W RSC 2 5 36 2 6 38 Rear 255 35 R 18 90 W RSC 2 9 42 3 1 45 Front 225 35 R 19 88 Y XL RSC 2 5 36 2 5 36 Rear 255 30 R 19 91 Y XL RSC 2 9 42 3 0 44 More details on the permissible load and weights refer to page 264 Tire inflation pressures Z4 sDrive35i Tire size Pressure specifications in bar PSI Traveling speeds ofup Traveling speeds in to 100 mph 160 km h cluding those exceed ing 100 mph 160 km h All pressure specifications in the table are in dicated in bar psi with cold tires Cold ambient temperature Without Sport Package 225 45 R 17 91 H M S RSC 225 45 R 17 94 V M S XL RSC Front 225 45 R 17 91 V RSC Rear 255 40 R 17 94 V RSC Front 225 40 R 18 88 W RSC Rear 255 35 R 18 90 W RSC Front 225 35 R 19 88 Y XL RSC Rear 255 30 R 19 91 Y XL RSC 230 3 0 44 2 1139 2 9 42 2 9 42 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 3 0 44 2 139 2 9 42 2 9 42 Wheels and tires Mobility Tire size Pressure specifications in bar PSI With
107. 96 Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc The sound is output on the vehicle loud speakers The volume of the sound output is de pendent on the device If necessary adjust the volume on the device Up to four external devices can be paired with the vehicle Requirements gt The device is suitable Details can be found at www bmwusa com bluetooth The device is ready for operation The ignition is switched on Bluetooth is activated on the vehicle refer to page 195 Bluetooth is activated on the vehicle Bluetooth presettings must be made on the device such as for a connection with out confirmation or visibility refer to the device operating instructions A number with at least four and a maximum of 16 digits is defined as the Bluetooth passkey It is only required once for pairing Pairing and connecting Pairing a device To avoid becoming distracted and pos ing an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehicle s occupants and to other road users only pair the device while the vehicle is station ary lt a i Ph oS CD Multimedia Bluetooth audio If necessary Bluetooth audio Add new phone 186 The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis played GF Bluetooth audio Add new p one Connected ae Handy 1 7 I Paired Gerat 1 Perform additional steps on the device re fer to the device operating instructions for instance search f
108. All around the headliner a fon E 1 Emergency Request 251 4 Readinglamp 91 SOS 5 amp Indicator lamp front passenger i airbag 94 2 Readinglamp 91 3 Interiorlamps 91 19 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Ataglance GEIG iDrive iDrive Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations The concept The iDrive combines the functions of a multi tude of switches Thus these functions can be operated from a central location Using the iDrive during a trip To avoid becoming distracted and pos ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle s occupants and to other road users never at tempt to use the controls or enter information unless traffic and road conditions allow this Controls at a glance Controls 1 Control Display 2 Controller with buttons 20 The buttons can be used to open the me nus directly The controller can be used to select menu items and create the settings Control Display Notes gt To clean the Control Display follow the care instructions refer to page
109. Brake Control DBC When you apply the brakes rapidly this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost It thus helps to achieve the short est possible braking distance during full brak ing This system utilizes all of the benefits pro vided by ABS Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the full braking Dynamic Stability Control DSC The concept DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels when driving away and accelerating DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi tions such as fishtailing or nose diving Sub ject to physical limits DSC helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes to the individual wheels Adjust your driving style to the situation An appropriate driving style is always the responsibility of the driver The laws of physics cannot be repealed even with DSC Therefore do not reduce the additional safety margin by driving in a risky manner lt Activating deactivating DSC DSC can be deactivated activated via the DSC OFF program of the Dynamic Driving Control refer to page 102 For better control The DSC indicator lamp flashes DSC oo is controlling the drive forces and brake forces The DSC indicator lamp lights up DSC has failed 101 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Driving stability control systems Operating the programs Dynamic Traction Cont
110. Dynamic Driving Control 102 Switching off engine 59 Switching off vehicle 59 Symbols 6 Tachometer 74 Tailgate opening from the in side 38 Tailgate refer to Trunk lid 38 Tailgate remote control 35 Tail lamps bulb replace ment 247 Tail lights 247 Tank display 74 Tasks 211 Technical changes refer to Safety 7 Technical data 264 Telephone 194 Telephone adjusting the vol ume 198 283 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Reference Everything from A to Z Telephone installation loca tion refer to Center arm rest 124 TeleService 217 Temperature air condi tioner 110 Temperature automatic cli mate control 112 Temperature changing the unit of measure 78 Temperature coolant 74 Temperature display external temperature 73 Temperature display external temperature warning 73 Temperature display setting the units 78 Temperature engine oil 74 Text messages 208 Theft alarm system refer to Alarm system 41 Thigh support adjustment 49 Third brake light refer to Center brake light 248 Through loading opening with integrated transport bag 121 Tilt alarm sensor 42 Tilting the passenger side mirror 52 Time setting the time 78 Tire age 232 Tire damage 233 Tire identification marks 231 Tire inflation pressure 228 Tire inflation pressure pres sure loss 97 Tire pressure monitoring re fer to FTM 94 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 96 Tire Pressure Mon
111. E l AUX IN port 7 Backup music on USB Import export USB At a glance gt For connecting audio devices e g MP3 player The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers Import music USB Music collection management Backup music on USB Restore music from USB gt Recommendation use medium tone and m volume settings on the audio device The tone depends on the quality of the audio files Connecting Storing the music collection in the vehicle When storing from the USB device the exist ing music collection in the vehicle is replaced CD Multimedia Music collection Open Options Music data import export ee a Restore music from USB The AUX IN port is in the center armrest 182 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 CD multimedia Entertainment Connect the headphone connector or line out connector of the device to the AUX IN port Playback 1 Connect the audio device switch it on and select a track on the audio device 2 CD Multimedia 3 If necessary External devices 4 AUX front Sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers Volume The volume of the sound output is dependent on the audio device If this volume differs markedly from the volume of the other audio sources it is advisable to adjust the volumes Adjusting the volume 1 CD Multimedia 2 If necessary External devices 3 AUX front 4 Volume G AUX
112. Even at temperatures above 37 F 3 C there can be a risk of ice on roads Therefore drive carefully on bridges and shady roads for example to avoid the increased dan ger of an accident lt Odometer and trip odometer Resetting trip odometer With the ignition switched on press button 1 in the instrument cluster When the vehicle is parked If you still want to view the time external tem perature and odometer reading briefly after the remote control has been taken out of the igni tion lock Press button 1 in the instrument cluster 73 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Displays Tachometer 1 min x 1000 Engine oil temperature of i ez F 0 250 4 l fab Cold engine the pointer is at the low tem perature end Drive at moderate engine and vehicle speeds Normal operating temperature the pointer is in the middle of the temperature display Hot engine the pointer is at the high tem perature end Switch off the engine imme diately and allow it to cool down If the engine oil temperature is too high a mes sage appears on the Control Display Never force the engine speed up into the red warning field see arrow In this range the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine Fuel gauge Coolant temperature A warning light will come on if the coolant and therefore the engine becomes too hot In addi tion a messa
113. Fogging of the windows when the auto matic climate control is switched on Vehicle battery charge is very low gt The interior has cooled down strongly with the heating switched on gt Low braking pressure such as from de pressing the brake pedal a number of times consecutively Activating deactivating the system manually Ql Press the button gt LED on the button lights up the Auto Start Stop function is deactivated The engine is started during an automatic engine stop The engine can only be stopped or started via the Start Stop button Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Driving Controls gt LED goes out the Auto Start Stop function is activated Automatic deactivation In certain situations the Auto Start Stop func tion is deactivated automatically in the interest of safety for example if the driver s absence is detected Malfunction 1 The automatic engine Start Stop A function no longer switches of the engine automatically The indicator lamp lights up A message appears on the Control Display t is possible to continue driv ing Have the system checked Parking brake The concept Your vehicle is equipped with an electrome chanical parking brake that can be set and re leased by using a switch The parking brake is primarily used to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is parked When the vehicle is stationary the parking brake acts on the rear whe
114. I 15 Opening and closing Controls Closing The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is nearby or in the passenger compartment Comfort Access supports the following func tions gt Unlocking locking of the vehicle Convenient closing Convenient opening Unlocking of the trunk lid separately VV V V Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunk Starting the engine lid make it easier to pull down the lid f Functional requirement Danger of pinching gt To lock the vehicle the remote control Make sure that the closing path of the must be located outside of the vehicle trunk lid is clear otherwise injuries may re gt The vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked sult lt again for approx the next two seconds Press the trunk lid down lightly gt The engine can only be started if the re mote control is inside the vehicle It is closed automatically Comparison to the standard remote control The specified functions can be controlled by pressing the button or via Comfort Access Emergency unlocking If you notice a brief delay while opening or closing the windows or retractable hardtop the system is checking whether a remote control is inside the vehicle Repeat the opening or clos ing procedure if necessary Unlocking Pull the lever in the cargo area The trunk lid unlocks o Comfort Access The concept The vehicle can be accessed without activat
115. Individual tracks and directories can be deleted later Deleting a track and directory refer to page 181 Tracks with DRM copy protection can be stored but cannot be played back Backing up music data Regularly back up the music data other wise it could be lost if there is a fault on the hard disc lt Sx Music recognition technology and re lated data are provided by Gracenote Gracenote is the industry stand ard in music recognition technology and re lated content delivery For more information please visit www gracenote com CD and music related data from Gracenote Inc copyright 2000 Gracenote up to now Gracenote Software Copyright 2000 Gracenote up to now This product and service may practice one or more of the following U S Patents 5 987 525 6 061 680 6 154 773 6 161 132 6 230 192 6 230 207 6 240 459 6 330 593 and other patents issued or pending Some serv ices supplied under license from Open Globe Inc for U S Patent 6 304 523 177 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Entertainment _ CD multimedia Storing from a CD DVD 1 Insert a CD or DVD into the CD DVD player 2 CD Multimedia 3 CD DVD 4 Select the symbol for the CD DVD player 5 Store in vehicle GF Audio CD 00 25 FQ Store in vehicle Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 The music collection is displayed and the first track of the CD DVD is played back During the storage proce
116. NACTIVE Display in the following situations gt A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted have the service center check it if neces Sary gt Malfunction have the system checked by your service center gt TPM could not be fully reset Reset the system again WD The small warning light flashes in yel L __ low and then lights up continuously Y the larger warning light comes on in yellow The tires are displayed in gray on the Control Display No flat tire can be de tected Display in the following situations gt Disturbance by systems or devices with the same radio frequency After leaving the area of the disturbance the system auto matically becomes active again Declaration according to NHTSA FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and in flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pres sure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pr
117. Open the trip computer gt Onboard infox gt Trip computer Vehicle Open the vehicle information Open the vehicle status Vehicle infox lt Vehicle status Navigation General information Navigation menu Open the destination entry Enter the address Enter the town city Enter the country Enter the postal code Open destination guidance Start destination guidance Terminate destination guidance Open the home address Open the route criteria Open the route Switch on the spoken instruction Navigation lt Enter address Enter address City State Postal Codex Guidance gt Start guidance Stop guidance gt Home address Route preference Route information lt Switch on voice instructions lt 267 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 RGG Short commands of the voice activation system Repeat the spoken instruction Switch off the spoken instruction Display the address book Display the most recent destinations Open the traffic bulletins Points of Interest Repeat voice instructions Switch off voice instructions Address book Last destinations lt gt Traffic Info lt Points of interest lt ap Display the map Map facing north Map facing the direction of travel Perspective map Automatic scaling of the map Scale feet Scale meters Scale kilometers Scale m
118. Sport Package 225 45 R 17 91 HM S RSC 2 5 36 3 0 44 2 51 36 3 0 44 225 45 R 17 94 V M S XL RSC Front 225 45 R 17 91 W RSC 2 5 36 2 5136 Rear 255 40 R 17 94 W RSC 2 7139 2 8 41 Front 225 40 R 18 88 W RSC 2 5 36 2 7139 Rear 255 35 R 18 90 W RSC 2 9 42 3 2 46 Front 225 35 R 19 88 Y XL RSC 2 5 36 2 5 36 Rear 255 30 R 19 91 Y XL RSC 2 9 42 3 0 44 More details on the permissible load and weights refer to page 264 Tire inflation pressures Z4 sDrive35is Tire size Pressure specifications in bar PSI Traveling speeds ofup Traveling speeds in to 100 mph 160 km h cluding those exceed ing 100 mph 160 km h All pressure specifications in the table are in dicated in bar psi with cold tires Cold ambient temperature 225 45 R 17 91 H M S RSC 2 5 36 3 0 44 2 5 36 3 0 44 225 45 R 17 94 V M S XL RSC Front 225 40 R 18 88 W RSC 2 7139 2 7139 Rear 255 35 R 18 90 W RSC 3 2146 3 2146 Front 225 35 R 19 88 Y XL RSC 2 5 36 2 5 36 Rear 255 30 R 19 91 Y XL RSC 3 0 44 3 0 44 More details on the permissible load and weights refer to page 264 Tire identification marks Tire size Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the exam apie R 17 Y tire makes it easier to identify and choose the 225 nominal width in mm right tires 45 aspect ratio in 231 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Mobility Wheels and tires R radial tire code 17 rim diameter in inches 91 load rat
119. Store station Changing settings 1 Select a field 2 Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed Volume settings PDC Gong Telephone during Setting possible only a call Microphone Loudspeak 3 Press the controller Activating deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a check box It indicates whether the function is acti vated or deactivated Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 iDrive EKLE EY Function is activated EJ The function is deactivated Example setting the clock Setting the clock 1 K Press the button The main menu is displayed 2 Turn the controller until Settings is high lighted and then press the controller Main menu CD Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation Office ConnectedDrive O Vehicle Info f Settings 3 If necessary move the controller to the left to display Time Date 4 Turn the controller until Time Date is highlighted and then press the controller E Settings a s Time Date Language Units Tone Speed Climate Lighting Door locks 5 Turn the controller until Time is high lighted and then press the controller Time zone UTC 01 00 Time 09 30 Format 24h Date 27 05 2012 Format tt mm jjjj 6 Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller
120. Switching off Press the button longer The LEDs go out 50 Safety belts General information Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving away Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection they are not a substitute for safety belts Seats with safety belt The vehicle has two seats each of which is equipped with a safety belt The shoulder strap s anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of every build if the seat is correctly adjusted One person per safety belt Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt Never allow infants or small children to ride on a passenger s lap lt Putting on the belt Lay the belt without twisting snugly across the lap and shoulders as close to the body as possible Make sure that the belt lies low around the hips in the lap area and does not press on the abdomen Otherwise the belt can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal impact and injure the abdomen The safety belt must not lie across the neck rub on sharp edges be routed over solid or breakable objects or be pinched Reduction of restraining effect Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the belt from fitting properly and pull the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the tension across your lap otherwise the retention effect of the safety belt may be reduced lt Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II
121. The indicator lamp flashes continuously af ter approx 10 seconds The interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor are not active gt The indicator lamp goes out after unlock ing The vehicle has not been tampered with gt Ifthe indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the remote control is inserted in the ignition but for no longer than approx 5 minutes An alarm has been triggered Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or tow the car 42 Interior motion sensor The interior of the car is monitored up to the height of the seat cushions Thus the alarm system is armed together with the interior mo tion sensor even if the hardtop is open An alarm can be triggered unintentionally by fall ing objects such as leaves refer to Avoiding unintentional alarms Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen sor can be switched off together such as in the following situations gt In automatic car washes gt In duplex garages gt During transport on car carrying trains at sea or on a trailer gt When animals are to remain in the vehicle Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor LocK Press the remote control button again within 10 seconds after the vehicle is locked The indicator lamp lights up for approx 2 sec onds and then continues flashing
122. USB memory card readers with mul tiple inserts Apple iPod iPhone Music from the Apple iPod iPhone can be played Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 CD multimedia Entertainment via the USB audio interface in the center armrest gt File systems standard file systems for USB devices are supported The FAT 32 format is recommended 1 Connect the USB device to the USB inter face in the glove compartment refer to page 124 CD Multimedia Music collection Open Options Music data import export 2 3 4 oF 6 Import export USB Import music USB Import music USB Music collection management Backup music on USB Restore music from USB Playing music Music search All tracks for which additional information has been stored can be accessed by the music search Tracks without additional information can be called up via the corresponding album refer to page 180 1 CD Multimedia 2 Music collection 3 Music search GF Music collection q Music search Current playback Top 50 Audio CD 1 v Frank USB 1 LIEBLINGSSONGS 4 Select the desired category GF Music search Genre All genres All artists All albums All titles Start play New search 5 Select the desired entry gt Select A Z search refer to page 25 and input the desired entry gt Select the desired entry from the list 6 Select other categories if you wi
123. a 032050 123 8 Speedometer Indicator lamps for turn signals Indicator warning lamps 17 Tachometer 74 Engine oil temperature 74 OahwaNnt A Display for gt Clock 73 gt External temperature 73 gt Indicator warning lamps 17 gt Cruise control 105 7 Display for gt Gear display 8 gear Sport automatic transmission 68 0 0 gt Gear display for 7 gear Sport auto matic transmission with dual clutch 69 16 V VV VV OV Computer 75 Date of next scheduled service and re maining distance to be driven 80 Odometer and trip odometer 73 Programs for Dynamic Driving Con trol 102 High beam Assistant 89 Resetting Tire Pressure Monitor 97 Checking engine oil level 238 Settings and information 77 A Check Control message present 84 Fuel gauge 74 Resetting the trip odometer 73 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Cockpit Ataglance a glance Indicator warning lights Indicator lights without text messages The following indicator lamps notify you that Instrument cluster certain functions are active Symbol Function or system Turn signal High beams headlight flasher Fi Lamp flashes DSF DSC or DTC is regulating the pro pulsive forces in order to maintain driving stability The indicator and warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colors Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning when the engine is st
124. adjustment button pressed gt Press briefly switch the display on off gt 3to6seconds set the compass zone gt 6 to 9 seconds calibrate the compass gt 9 to 12 seconds set left hand right hand steering gt 12 to 15 seconds set the language Setting compass zones Set the compass zone corresponding to your vehicle s geographic location so that the com pass can function correctly refer to the world map with compass zones Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Interior equipment Controls In order to set the compass zones press and of your vehicle and that you have enough hold the adjustment button for 3 4 seconds space to drive in a circle The number of the compass zone set is shown 2 Set the currently valid compass zone in the display in the display 3 Ensure that the retractable hardtop is fully To change the zone setting briefly press the closed adjustment button repeatedly until the display shows the number of the compass zone corre sponding to your current location 4 Press the adjustment button for 6 7 sec onds to call up C Then drive at least one full circle at a maximum speed of The compass is operational again after approx 4 mph 7 km h When the system is cali 10 seconds brated the C is replaced by the compass directions oun the digital PERES 5 Open the retractable hardtop fully and re The digital compass must be calibrated in the peat step 4 following si
125. age subscription Options LY Split screen Close control display Satellite radio Manage subscription Set jump 5 The phone number and an electronic serial number ESN are displayed 6 Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the chan nels Selecting channels You can only listen to enabled channels The selected channel is stored for the remote control currently in use ia the iDrive 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 Select All channels or the desired cate gory 4 Select the desired channel WE Satellite radio Q Snow Patrol A Chasing Cars All channels koa 001 Sirius Hits 1 jf v 002 Starlite J 003 Sirius Love Movin EZ Press the button The next channel is selected 167 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Entertainment Entertainment _ Radio Via direct channel entry 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 c Set channel 4 Turn the controller until the desired chan nel is reached and press the controller Storing a channel 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 If necessary open All channels or the de sired category 4 Select the desired channel 5 Press the controller again 6 Press the controller again to confirm the highlighted channel M Store Store in presets 001 Sirius Hits 1 Store in favorites The Fray Over My Head Cable 7 Select the desired memory location The channels are stored for the remote control currently in us
126. ages Calendar Tasks Reminders 2172 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Short commands of the voice activation system WROCI ___ Short commands of the voice activation system SESE Contacts Select a name gt Choose namex My contacts gt My contacts Open the contacts gt Contacts New contact New contact ConnectedDrive or BMW Assist Open BMW Assist gt B M W Assist Open ConnectedDrive gt Connected Drives Open BMW Online gt B M W Online 273 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Reference Everything from A to Z Everything from A to Z Index A ABS Antilock Brake Sys tem 101 Acceleration assistant Launch Control 71 Accident refer to Initiating an Emergency Request 251 Activated charcoal filter with automatic climate con trol 114 Adaptive brake lights see Brake force display 100 Adaptive Light Control 88 Additional telephone 194 Additives coolant 241 Additives oil 240 After washing vehicle 258 Airbags 92 Airbags indicator warning light 94 Air circulation refer to Recir culated air mode 110 113 Air conditioner 110 Air conditioning mode air conditioner 110 Air conditioning mode auto matic climate control 112 Air conditioning mode venti lation 111 115 Air distribution auto matic 113 Air distribution individ ual 111 Air distribution manual 111 Air flow rate 111 114 Airing refer to Ventila tion 111 11
127. ages refer to Check Control 84 278 Failure of an electrical acces sory 250 False alarm avoiding uninten tional alarms 42 False alarm ending an alarm 41 Fastening safety belts refer to Safety belts 50 Filter refer to Microfilter acti vated charcoal filter with au tomatic climate control 114 Filter refer to Microfilter for air conditioner 111 Fine wood care 259 First aid kit 252 Flashing when locking unlocking 36 Flat tire Flat Tire Monitor FTM 94 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 94 Flat Tire Monitor snow chains 235 Flat tire Tire Pressure Moni tor TPM 96 Flat tire warning light 95 Flat tire wheel change 248 Flooding 131 Floor carpet care 260 Floor mats care 260 FM AM station 164 Foot brake 131 Footwell lights refer to Inte rior lights 91 For your own safety 7 Front airbags 92 Front passenger airbags de activating 93 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 94 Fuel average consump tion 75 Fuel consumption display average fuel consump tion 75 Fuel display 74 Fuel filler flap 224 Fuel filler flap unlocking in case of an electrical mal function 224 Fuel gauge 74 Fuel recommendation 226 Fuel refer to Average fuel consumption 75 Fuel tank capacity refer to Filling capacities 265 Fuel tank contents refer to Filling capacities 265 Fuses 250 G Garage door opener refer to Integrated universal remote control 116 Gasoline display 74 Gasoline fuel recommenda tion 226 Gas
128. air distribu tion 113 Automatic cruise control 105 Automatic Curb Monitor 52 Automatic headlamp con trol 88 Automatic recirculated air control 113 Automatic Start Stop func tion 59 Automatic transmission 7 gear with dual clutch 68 Automatic transmission 8 gear 66 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Everything from A to Z Reference AUTO program with auto matic climate control 113 AUX IN port 182 Average fuel consumption 75 Average fuel consumption setting the unit 78 Average speed 75 Axle loads refer to Weights 264 Backrest curvature refer to Lumbar support 49 Backrests refer to Seat ad justment 48 Backrest width adjust ment 50 Backup lights bulb replace ment 247 Balance 162 Band aids refer to First aid kit 252 Bass 162 Battery disposal 41 Battery power failure 249 Battery remote control 32 Battery replacement in the remote control 41 Battery replacement vehicle battery 249 Battery vehicle 249 Before entering the car wash 257 Belts refer to Safety belts 50 Belt tensioners refer to Safety belts 50 Beverage holder refer to Cu pholder 126 Black and white map dis play 156 Blower refer to Air flow rate 111 114 Bluetooth audio 185 Bluetooth connection acti vating deactivating 195 BMW Apps 220 BMW Driver s Guide App 6 BMW EfficientDynamics re fer to Saving fuel 134 BMW Homepage 6 BMW Internet page 6 BMW Maintenance Sys
129. ardtop Do not place any objects on the retractable hardtop or on the trunk lid otherwise they could fall during movements of the retractable hardtop and cause damage or injury lt Before opening and closing Always open or close the hardtop fully Do not let the hardtop stop in an inter mediate position when opening or closing Otherwise there is the danger of personal in jury since the hardtop will be lowered automat ically after a few minutes lt gt Observe the safety precautions above gt Ensure that the trunk lid is closed gt The vehicle should be parked on fairly level ground Excessive angle is indicated by a light gt Fold down the cargo area partition and make sure it engages refer to the instruc tions below gt Do not place any objects next to or on the cargo area partition and close the storage compartment on the left side of the cargo area gt Do not exceed the maximum loading height under the cargo area partition refer to the label in the cargo area showing a line Indicating the maximum height Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Opening and closing Controls Folding down the cargo area partition area partition arrow and make sure it engages on both sides Opening and closing In the radio ready state or beyond refer to page 58 and when the vehicle is stationary If possible conserve the battery by only oper ating the retractable hardtop when the
130. ardtop when you park the vehicle Not only does the closed hardtop protect the vehicle interior against unanticipated weather damage it also offers theft protec tion However even when the hardtop is closed valuables should only be stored in the locked cargo area gt Do not attach roof rack systems to the re tractable hardtop and in particular do not attach magnetic racks gt Do not attach rack systems to the trunk lid and in particular do not attach magnetic racks gt When the retractable hardtop is operated the trunk lid swings back and up Before operating the retractable hardtop ensure that there is enough clearance e g In tight parking spaces gt If you open the hardtop while it is wet e g after driving in the rain water may drip into the cargo area If necessary remove items from the cargo area beforehand to avoid water stains or soiling gt Opening and closing while the vehicle is moving can cause air turbulence in the cargo area Properly stow away objects in the cargo area gt At temperatures below 14 F 10 C the retractable hardtop cannot be moved A message appears on the Control Display Do not touch the mechanism and keep the opening path clear During opening and closing do not reach into the mechanism and keep children away from 44 the opening path of the retractable hardtop otherwise there is the risk of injury lt Do not place objects on the retractable h
131. are applications iPhone 220 Software part number 194 Software update 189 SOS refer to Emergency Re quest initiating 251 Spare fuses 250 Special destinations naviga tion 145 Special equipment series equipment 6 Specified oil types 240 Speed average 75 Speed limit 85 Speedometer 16 Split screen 24 Split screen map set tings 155 Spoken instructions naviga tion 153 SPORT program Dynamic Driving Control 103 Sport program 7 gear auto matic transmission 70 Sport program 8 gear auto matic transmission 67 SPORT program Dynamic Driving Control 103 Spray nozzles refer to Clean ing the windshield and head lamps 64 Stability control systems 101 Start Stop button 57 Start Stop button starting the engine 58 Start Stop button switching off the engine 59 Starting aid 252 Starting the engine 58 State province selecting for navigation 142 Stations stored 170 Station storing 164 Status information iDrive 23 Status of Owner s Manual 6 Steam jets 257 Steering wheel 54 Steering wheel adjusting 54 Steering wheel buttons on the steering wheel 14 Stopping engine 59 Storage compartments 125 Storage tires 235 Storing the seat position re fer to Seat and mirror mem ory 51 Storing the vehicle 260 Street entering for naviga tion 143 Summer tires refer to Wheels and tires 228 Summer tires tread 233 Suspension settings 102 Switches refer to Cockpit 14 Switch for
132. art no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Entertainment _ CD multimedia CD multimedia Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Controls JW WJ WJ SY a Volume on off Eject CD DVD CD DVD drive Change the entertainment source Change station track ont N Programmable memory buttons Sound output Switching on off When the ignition is switched off press ON OFF button on the radio 172 Muting When the ignition is switched on or the engine is running press the ON OFF button on the radio CD DVD Playback Loading the CD DVD player Insert the CD DVD with the printed side up Playback begins automatically Reading can take a few minutes with com pressed audio files Starting playback A CD DVD is contained in the CD DVD player 1 CD Multimedia 2 CD DVD 3 Select the desired CD or DVD GF CD DVD wv amp Best of Brothers in arms amp CD Rom Ss Mezzanine CD DVD player Playable formats gt DVD DVD ROM DVD R DVD R DVD RW DVD RW DVD R DL DVD R DL
133. arted or the Parking brake set ignition is switched on and light up briefly wo gt x m Text messages Text messages at the upper edge of the Con trol Display explain the meaning of the dis played indicator and warning lamps Canada the parking brake is set w ERVIC Engine malfunction with adverse ef ENGINE SOON fect on exhaust emissions m You can call up additional information e g on the cause of a malfunction and on how to re i i If i i spond via Check Control refer to page 84 Canada engine malfunction with adverse effect on exhaust emis In urgent cases this information will be shown sions as soon as the corresponding light comes on O 17 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Ataglance GEIE Cockpit All around the center console 1 Control Display 20 Close the retractable hard 4 top 44 2 Hazard warning system 251 Op 3 Central locking system 37 Open the retractable hard 4 gt Aijrconditioner 110 da top 44 gt Automatic climate control 112 5 Hard drive for gt Audio CD DVD 172 gt Navigation DVD 140 6 Controls for gt Radio 164 gt CD DVD 172 7 Seat heating 50 P Y PDC Park Distance Control 107 Deactivate the Automatic Engine Start Stop Function 59 2 8 Parking brake 61 9 Controller with buttons 20 10 Buttons for Dynamic Driving Control 102 18 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Cockpit BEEKIE
134. artition wall To open pull the handle The intermediate floor of the storage compart ment can be removed and inserted at various heights Removing the storage compartment The storage compartment can be removed completely to be able to use other inserts for example 125 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Storage compartments In the cargo area Unsuitable containers Press the handles up and fold the storage Do not forcefully push unsuitable con compartment completely down tainers into the cupholders This may result in More information on the various inserts availa Gamage lt ble can be obtained from your service center In the center armrest Behind the seats The rear storage shelf can be used to stow briefcases for example a The cupholders are located in the center arm rest Observe when loading the rear storage Attachable cupholder shelf gt When loading the rear storage shelf do not move both seats all the way forward while moving them to their uppermost position and leaning the backrests forward Other wise the seats could hit and damage the seal on the windshield and the sun visor Attaching to the center console e as qun eee am cee ee ee e jA gt Only transport light and small objects on the rear storage shelf otherwise braking maneuvers and swerving may lead to a maa safety hazard due to objects flying about the passe
135. at least 3 mph 5 km h 1 Settings 2 Speed 3 Warning at piama A Speed Warning at km h O Warning Select current speed 4 Turn the controller until the desired limit is displayed 5 Press the controller The speed limit is stored Activating deactivating the limit 1 Settings 2 Speed 3 Warning 4 Press the controller Applying your current speed as the limit 1 Settings 2 Speed 3 Select current soeed 4 Press the controller The system adopts your current speed as the limit 86 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Lamps Controls Lamps Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Ata glance 0 Lamps off Daytime running lights 1 Parking lights and daytime running lights 2 lLow beam headlights and welcome lights 3 Automatic headlamp control daytime run ning lights welcome lamps High beam Assistant and Adaptive Light Control When you open the driver s door with the igni tion switched off the exterior lighting is auto matically switched o
136. ated can be influenced by selecting certain criteria gt The route criteria can be changed when the destination is entered and during desti nation guidance gt Road types are part of the navigation data and are taken into consideration when planning a route e g avoid highways gt The recommended route may differ from the route you would take based on per sonal experience gt The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use gt Destination guidance with traffic bulletins refer to page 157 Changing the route criteria 1 Navigation 2 Map 3 tw st Route preference 4 Select the criterion gt t Fast route time optimized route being a combination of the shortest possible route and the fastest roads gt J ECO PRO route or Efficient route optimized combination of the fastest and shortest possible route 151 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Navigation Destination guidance gt Short route short distance irre spective of how fast or slow progress will be gt Alternative routes if available alter native routes are suggested during ac tive destination guidance The individual suggestions are high lighted in color Ce Route Ce Route preference 7 Fast route ECO PRO route Short route as Alternative routes 10 24 10 27 5 Specify additional criteria for the route if necessary gt Avoid high
137. ated when a stereo audio track is played Volume gt Speed volume soeed dependent vol ume control gt PDC volume of the PDC signal com pared to the entertainment sound output gt Gong volume of the signal such as the safety belt reminder compared to the en tertainment sound output gt Microphone volume of the microphone during a phone call gt Loudspeak volume of the loudspeakers during a phone call The following volumes are only stored for the respective paired telephone Microphone Loudspeak Adjusting the volume 1 CD Multimedia Radio or Settings 2 Tone 3 Volume settings 4 Select the desired volume setting G Volume settings Gong Telephone Setting possible only during a call Microphone mim Loudspeak 5 To adjust turn the controller 6 To store press the controller Resetting the tone settings All tone settings can be reset to the default setting 1 CD Multimedia Radio or Settings 2 Tone 3 Reset 163 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Entertainment _ Radio Radio Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety
138. atically in the event of gt Incoming and outgoing telephone calls gt Activation of the voice activation system gt Muting The audio playback then continues with a time delay To activate Radio Satellite radio Replay Time shift A Automatic time shift To deactivate y Automatic time shift he hb Storing favorites Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favor ites list Available favorites are artist track game league and team Storing the artist track or game It is only possible to store favorites that are currently being broadcast The channel infor mation must be available 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 If necessary open All channels or the de sired category 4 Select the desired channel 5 Press the controller again 6 Select the artist track or game Storing the league or team Leagues or teams can be added to the favor ites from a selection list 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 Xt Manage favorites 4 Add sports information A1 i GF Favorites W Activate alert ah Artists amp The Fray I f Titles EY Proud Mary 1969 EY Livin On A Prayer 1987 Add sports information 5 Select the league 6 Select Add all teams or the desired team Opening the favorites If an activated favorite is played back the fol lowing message appears for approx 20 sec onds Favorite alert v Favorites Select the symbol while t
139. aunch Control Launch Control enables you to drive off with an optimal vehicle acceleration on a high grip road surface Do not use Launch Control too often Do not use Launch Control too often as the higher loads on the vehicle lead to prema ture component wear lt Launch Control is available when the engine is at operating temperature i e after driving con tinuously for at least 6 miles 10 km 1 With the engine running depress the brake pedal with your left foot 2 Activate the SPORT program of the Dy namic Driving Control refer to page 102 3 With the vehicle stationary activate manual mode and select first gear 4 Press the accelerator all the way down The engine speed when driving off is con trolled A flag symbol appears in the instru ment cluster 5 The vehicle accelerates when you release the brake pedal Keep the accelerator pressed all the way down 6 The transmission shifts up automatically as long as the accelerator is pressed all the way down Launch Control only becomes available again after a certain distance has been driven Launch Control can only be used after the break in phase refer to page 130 To maintain driving stability activate DSC whenever possible Manually releasing and engaging the transmission lock If a power failure occurs e g if the battery is discharged or disconnected the transmission lock must be released manually otherwise the rear wheels are blo
140. avy objects Never transport unsecured heavy or hard objects in the passenger compartment as they could be thrown around and pose a safety haz ard to the vehicle s occupants during abrupt braking or evasive maneuvers lt No fluids in the cargo area Make sure that fluids do not leak into the cargo area otherwise the vehicle may be dam aged lt Determining the load limit 1 Locate the following statement on your ve hicle s placard gt The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs Otherwise damage to the vehicle and unstable driving situations may result 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds 4 Theresulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load ca pacity For example if the YYY amount equals 1 400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ibs pas sengers in your vehicle the amount of Driving tips available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1 400 lbs minus 750 Ibs 650 Ibs 5 Determine the combined weight of lug gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi cle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transfered to your vehicle Consult the ma
141. ay without delay After the foot brake is released the vehicle is held in place for approx 2 seconds Depending on the vehicle load the vehicle may roll back slightly Driving off without delay After releasing the foot brake start driv ing without delay since the drive off assistant will not hold the vehicle in place for more than approx 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling back lt 104 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Driving comfort Controls Driving comfort Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Cruise control The concept Cruise control is available for use at speeds of approx 20 mph 30 km h and higher The car then stores and maintains the speed that you specify using the lever on the steering column In order to maintain the specified speed the system brakes the vehicle when the engine braking effect is insufficient on downhill gradi ents Do not use cruise control Do not use the system if unfavorable conditions make it impossible to drive at a con stant speed for instan
142. ay from P or N with the vehicle stationary depress the brake otherwise the transmission will not shift Press on the brake pedal until you start driving To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start lt Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di rection beyond a resistance point if necessary When shifting out of P or into R press button 1 at the same time The engaged transmission position is also dis played on the selector lever When you release the selector lever it returns to its center position Driving N is Neutral The vehicle can roll N remains engaged after the engine is switched off if the remote control remains in the ignition lock This function can be used in an automatic car wash refer to page 257 for example P is automatically engaged after ap prox 30 minutes D Drive mode In Drive mode all forward gears are shifted au tomatically R is Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary P Park The rear wheels are locked P is engaged automatically when the following conditions are met gt The driver s door is opened while the en gine is running the safety belt is not fas tened and neither the brake pedal nor the accelerator is activated gt The engine is switched off unless N is en gaged and the remote control is in the igni tion lock gt The remote cont
143. broad Requirements Different variants of TeleService may be imple mented in the vehicle The following condi tions must always be met gt Wireless reception is available gt The ignition is switched on gt A current ConnectedDrive subscription or a vehicle equipped with intelligent Emer gency Request Concierge service General information The Concierge service offers information on events gas stations and hotels and provides phone numbers and addresses Hotels can be booked directly using the Concierge service The Concierge service is part of the optional Convenience Plan Starting the Concierge service 1 BMW Assist or ConnectedDrive 2 Concierge i ConnectedDrive BMW Assist Concierge Messages Roadside Assistance BMW Online Customer Relations Service Request 3 Start service A voice connection is established with the Concierge service Phone numbers and ad dresses can be transmitted to the vehicle Messages Information on messages refer to page 208 Roadside Assistance At a glance BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a break down Roadside Assistance can also be contacted via a Check Control message refer to page 84 217 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Communication onnectedDriv Starting Roadside Assistance without TeleService 1 BMW Assist or ConnectedDrive 2 R
144. ce gt On curvy roads gt In heavy traffic gt On slippery roads in fog snow or rain or on a loose road surface Otherwise you could lose control of the vehi cle and cause an accident lt Manual transmission You can shift gears while cruise control is acti vated An indicator lamp notifies you that you should shift gears when you drive for an ex tended period at very high or very low engine speeds or the system is deactivated One lever for all functions 1 Storing and maintaining speed or acceler ating 2 Storing and maintaining speed or deceler ating 3 Deactivating cruise control 4 Resuming a speed stored beforehand Maintaining current speed Push the lever arrow 1 or pull it briefly ar row 2 The car s current speed is stored and main tained It is displayed on the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster On uphill gradients it may prove impossible to maintain the set speed if current engine power output is insufficient If the engine braking ef fect is insufficient on downhill slopes the sys tem will brake the vehicle slightly Increasing desired speed Repeatedly press the lever to the resistance point or beyond arrow 1 until the desired speed is reached gt Each time the lever is pressed to the point of resistance the desired speed increases by approx 1 mph 1 km h 105 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Driving comfort
145. ces an acoustic signal and text messages at the bottom of the Con trol Display Indicator warning lights amp The indicator and warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colors 84 4 indicates that Check Control messages have been stored You can view the Check Control messages whenever it is convenient for you Explanatory text messages Text messages at the upper edge of the Con trol Display explain the meaning of the dis played indicator and warning lights For most Check Control messages you can view more information later e g regarding the cause of a malfunction and how to respond re fer to the information provided below In urgent cases this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding light comes on Symbols The following functions can be selected within the supplementary text message depending on the Check Control message gt Service request Contact the service partner gt amp Roadside Assistance Contact Roadside Assistance Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Displays Controls Press the button on the turn indicator lever Some Check Control messages are displayed until the malfunctions have been rectified They cannot be hidden If several malfunctions occur at the same time they are displayed in succession They are marked with the symbol shown here Other messages are automatically hidden after a
146. change the distance between the interior rearview mirror and the hand held transmitter and repeat the step Multi ple trials at different distances may be nec essary Wait at least 15 seconds between trials Canada if the programming procedure with the hand held transmitter was inter rupted press and hold the button on the interior rearview mirror and press the but ton on the hand held transmitter multiple times for 2 seconds each and release 6 To program additional functions on other buttons repeat steps 3 to 5 The systems can be operated with the buttons on the interior rearview mirror Special characteristics of alternating code radio systems If the system cannot be operated after re peated programming check whether the sys tem to be operated uses an alternating code system Read the operating instructions of the system or press and hold the programmed button on the interior rearview mirror If the LED on the interior rearview mirror flashes rapidly at first and then lights up continuously for 2 seconds the system is equipped with an alternating code system This flashing LED pattern re peats itself for approx 20 seconds In systems with an alternating code system the universal garage door opener and the sys tem must be additionally synchronized Please obtain additional information on syn chronization in the operating instructions of the system being set up The systems will be easier to synchro
147. cked and the vehicle cannot be towed Release the transmission lock manually for towing only and set the parking brake before hand to prevent the vehicle from rolling After parking the vehicle engage the transmission lock again manually refer to page 72 Manual release 1 Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever 2 Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever until the sleeve is inside out 3 Unclip and raise cover frame 71 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Driving 4 Insert an Allen wrench of the right size into the cap ER kd TA A Se sa N WTS 5 Turn the cap with the Allen wrench ar row 1 and remove it arrow 2 6 Insert the Allen wrench into the opening arrow 1 Turn the Allen wrench in the correct direction Do not turn the Allen wrench in the oppo site direction as this may damage the mechanism 3 A J17 Y N Te 3 7 Turn the Allen wrench as far as it will go arrow 2 The transmission lock is released 8 Draw the Allen wrench out of the opening Locking the transmission lock again After parking the vehicle lock the trans mission lock again to prevent the vehicle from rolling 72 Locking manually 1 Press the button see arrow The transmis sion lock is locked again 2 Clip the cover frame back into place 3 Clip the sleeve of the selector lever back in place 4 Set the parking brake Jum
148. compatible with the universal ga rage door opener If you have any questions please contact gt Your service center gt www homelink com on the Internet HomeL_ink is a registered trademark of the Gentex Corporation Controls on the interior rearview mirror 1 Buttons 2 LED 3 Hand held transmitter required for pro gramming Programming General information 1 Switch on the ignition 2 Initial setup Press the right and left buttons on the inte rior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap prox 20 seconds until the LED on the inte rior rearview mirror begins to flash All programmed settings of the buttons on the interior rearview mirror are deleted Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Interior equipment Controls 3 Hold the hand held transmitter of the sys tem to be operated a distance of approx 1 to 3 in 2 5 to 8 cm away from the buttons on the interior rearview mirror The re quired distance depends on the particular hand held transmitter 4 Press the button of the desired function on the hand held transmitter and the button being programmed on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously and hold The LED on the interior rearview mirror flashes slowly at first 5 When the LED flashes more rapidly re lease both buttons Rapid flashing indi cates that the button on the interior rear view mirror has been programmed If the LED does not flash faster after 60 seconds
149. copy pro tection feature by the manufacturer This can mean that some CDs DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to a limited extent MACROVISION This product contains copyrighted technology that is based on multiple registered US patents and the intellectual property of the Macrovision Corporation and other manufacturers The use of this copy protection must be approved by Macrovision Media protected by this product unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision may only be used for private purposes Copy ing of this technology is prohibited DTS Digital Surround dts e Manufactured under license under U S Patent Numbers 5 451 942 5 956 674 5 974 380 5 978 762 6 487 535 amp and other patents granted and registered in the USA and worldwide DTS and the logo are registered trademarks amp DTS Digital Surround and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS Inc DTS Inc All rights reserved Music collection Storing music General information Music tracks from CDs DVDs and USB devices can be stored in the music collection on a hard disc in the vehicle and played from there gt Audio CD tracks are converted into a com pressed audio format If available informa tion on the album such as the artist is stored as well gt CD DVD or USB device with compressed audio files the entire content of the CD DVD or the USB device is stored in the vehicle as an album The WMA MP3 M4A and AAC formats are stored
150. cro fasteners are closed lt Caring for special components Light alloy wheels When cleaning the wheels on the vehicle only use a neutral wheel rim cleaner with a pH value of 5 to 9 Do not use abrasive cleaners ora steam jet hotter than 140 F 60 C otherwise damage may result Adhere to the manufac turer instructions Aggressive acidic or alkaline cleaners may destroy the protective coating of neighboring components such as the brake disc Chrome surfaces Carefully clean components such as the radia tor grille or door handles with an ample supply of water possibly with shampoo added partic ularly when they have been exposed to road Salt Rubber components Aside from water treat only with rubber cleansers When cleaning rubber seals do not use any silicon containing car care products in order to avoid damage or reduced noise damping Fine wood parts Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo nents only with a moist rag Then dry witha soft cloth Plastic components These include Imitation leather surfaces Headliner Lamp lenses Instrument cluster cover Matte black spray coated components VV VV OV Painted parts in the interior Clean with a microfiber cloth Moisten the cloth lightly with water if neces Sary Do not soak the headliner Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents such as lacquer thinners h
151. d diameter of 4 7 in 12 cm and do not play CDs DVDs with an adapter e g single CDs otherwise the CDs or the adapter may Jam and no longer eject gt Do not use combined CDs DVDs e g DVD Plus as the CDs DVDs can jam and will no longer eject General malfunctions gt CD DVD players have been optimized for performance in vehicles In some instances they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs DVDs than stationary devices would be gt Ifa CD DVD cannot be played first check whether it has been inserted correctly Humidity High levels of humidity can lead to condensa tion on the CD DVD or the laser s scan lens and temporarily prevent playback Malfunctions involving individual CDs DVDs If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs DVDs this can be due to one of the following Causes Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 CD multimedia Entertainment Self recorded CDs DVDs gt Possible reasons for malfunctions with self recorded CDs DVDs are inconsistent data creation or recording processes or poor quality or old age of the blank CD DVD gt Only label CDs DVDs on the upper side with a pen intended for this purpose Damage gt Avoid fingerprints dust scratches and moisture Store CDs DVDs in a sleeve gt Do not subject CDs DVDs to temperatures over 122 F 50 C high humidity or direct sunlight CDs DVDs with copy protection CDs DVDs are often provided with a
152. d M S manual mode N N Press button P Activating the Sport program DS Va 7 A gt oa ys z P A a A gt lt lt Push the selector lever to the left out of trans mission position D The Sport program is activated and DS is dis played in the instrument cluster This position is recommended for a perform ance oriented driving style Activating the M S manual mode 1 Push the selector lever to the left out of transmission position D 2 Push the selector lever forward or back ward Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed The engaged gear is displayed in the instru ment cluster e g M1 When the maximum engine speed is reached the transmission automatically shifts up when in M S manual mode Shifting in manual mode gt To shift down press the selector lever for ward gt To shift up press the selector lever back ward The gears are only shifted at a suitable engine and vehicle speed e g a downshift is not car ried out at excessively high engine speeds The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in strument cluster followed by the current gear Avoid automatic upshifting in M S manual mode Gears are not shifted automatically for in stance at maximum engine speed if one of the following conditions is met gt DSC is deactivated gt TRACTION is activated gt SPORT is activated
153. d date format refer to Setting the date format below 79 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Displays 3 Format 4 Select the desired format 43 Date format dd mm yyyy mmiddiyyyy The date format is stored Settings on the Control Display Language Setting the language To set the language on the Control Display 1 Settings 2 Language Units 3 Language Language Units Language Deutsch Speech mode Default Consumption 1 100 km Distance km Temperature ake 4 Select the desired language The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use Setting the voice dialog Voice dialog for the voice activation system refer to page 28 80 Brightness Setting the brightness To set the brightness of the Control Display 1 Settings 2 Control display 3 Brightness F Control display Brightness 4 Turn the controller until the desired bright ness is set 5 Press the controller The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use Depending on the light conditions the bright ness control may not be clearly visible Service requirements Display 10000 i 12 2009 i ae The remaining driving distance and the date of the next maintenance are displayed briefly af ter the ignition is switched on Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Displays Controls The current s
154. d road hazards and reduce your speed especially if your vehicle is equipped with low profile tires Inspect your tires often for damage foreign objects lodged in the tread and tread wear Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de fects gt Unusual vibrations during driving gt Unusual handling such as a strong ten dency to pull to the left or right In case of tire damage If there are indications of tire damage re duce your speed immediately and have the wheels and tires checked right away other wise there is the increased risk of an accident Drive carefully to the next service center or tire shop 233 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Mobility Wheels and tires If necessary have the vehicle towed lt Repair of tire damage For safety reasons the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you do not have damaged tires repaired they should be re placed Otherwise damage can occur as a re sult lt Run flat tires Label RSC label on the tire sidewall The wheels are composed of special rims and tires that are self supporting to a limited de gree The support of the sidewall allows the tire to remain drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a pressure loss Driving can continue with a damaged tire refer to page 96 Changing run flat tires For your own safety only use run flat tires No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire Your
155. dam aged lt Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Things to remember when driving Drivingtips tips Closing the trunk lid Drive with the trunk lid closed Only operate the vehicle with the trunk lid closed otherwise exhaust fumes could en ter the passenger compartment lt If the vehicle must be driven with the trunk lid open 1 Close all windows 2 Greatly increase the air flow rate of the air conditioner or automatic climate control Hot exhaust system Hot exhaust system High temperatures are generated in the exhaust system Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them Make sure that flammable materials e g hay leaves grass etc do not come in contact with the hot exhaust system during driving while in idle po sition mode or when parked Such contact could lead to a fire and with it the risk of seri ous personal injury as well as property dam age Do not touch hot exhaust pipes otherwise there is the danger of getting burned lt Mobile communication devices in the vehicle Mobile communication devices in the ve hicle It is not recommended to use mobile phones such as mobile phones without a direct con nection to an external aerial in the vehicle s passenger compartment Otherwise the vehi cle electronics and mobile communication de vices can interfere with each other In addition there is no assurance that the radiation gener
156. dlight glasses do not need to be changed If the condensation in the headlights does not evaporate after trips with the lights switched on and the amount of moisture in the head lights increases for example if water droplets form have them checked by your service cen ter Headlight setting Changing the bulbs and lights may influence the headlight settings Have the headlight set ting checked by a service center and corrected if necessary after changing bulbs or lights 246 Xenon headlights Ata glance 1 Parking lights daytime running lights 2 Low beams high beams headlight flasher 3 Turn signal Because of the long life of these bulbs the likelihood of failure is very low Switching the lights on and off frequently shortens their life Do not perform work bulb replacement on xenon headlamps Have any work on the xenon lighting system including bulb replacement performed only by a service center Due to the high voltage present in the system there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly lt Adhere to the general instructions refer to page 245 With Xenon headlights the following lights are designed with LED technology gt Parking and roadside parking lights gt Daytime running lights Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Replacing components Mobility Turn signals front Tail lights
157. does not affect the planned route or direction Traffic bulletins refer to page 155 Planned route After destination guidance is started the plan ned route is displayed on the map 154 Status fields Show hide press the controller gt Upper status field time telephone and en tertainment details gt Lower status field symbol for active desti nation guidance status of traffic bulletins time of arrival and distance to destination Function bar The following functions are available in the function bar Symbol Function wy Start end destination guidance ry Switch spoken instructions on off wo J s Change the route criteria anh Search for a special destina tion A Display traffic bulletins Open the interactive map M AN Set the map view oO Change the scale To change to the function bar move the con troller to the left Changing the map section Interactive map gt To shift the map move the controller in the required direction gt To shift the map diagonally move the con troller in the required direction and turn it Changing the scale 1 Select the symbol 2 Tochange the scale turn the controller Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Destination guidance Navigation Automatically scaled map scale In the map view facing north turn the control ler in any direction until the AUTO scale is dis played The entire route between the curr
158. dress book s Last destinations Points of Interest WETE Stored trips Route information Starting destination guidance 1 Navigation 2 Last destinations 3 Select the destination 4 Start guidance Editing the destination 1 Navigation Last destinations Highlight the destination Open Options Edit destination a ie Pe Deleting the last destinations 1 Navigation Last destinations Highlight the destination Open Options o gt oe a Delete entry or Delete all last destinations Special destinations General information Even with the latest navigation data informa tion on specific Points of Interest may have 145 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Navigation Destination entry changed for example gas stations might not be in operation Opening the search for Points of Interest Selection of Points of Interest such as hotels or tourist attractions 1 Navigation 2 Points of Interest 3 Select the search function Online Search 1 Google Local Search 2 Select a special destination 3 Select the symbol 4 Start guidance A Z search 1 A Z search Town City Select or enter the town city Category Select the category oe f Category details For some Points of Interest multiple cate gory details can be selected Move the controller to the left to leave the category details 7 Keyword 8 Enter
159. e The channels can also be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons refer to page 24 Changing the list view The list view changes every time the first sym bol on the navigation bar is pressed Information on the channel is displayed EA Channel name EA Artist mn Track 168 Selecting a category 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 K Category 4 Select the desired category Timeshift Approx one hour of the program being broad cast on the channel currently being listened to is stored in a buffer Prerequisite the signal must be available The stored audio track can be played with a delay following the live broadcast When the buffer is full the older tracks are overwritten The buffer is cleared when a new channel is selected Opening the timeshift function 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 Replay Time shift Snow Patrol SJE Chasing Cars gt The red arrow shows the current playback position gt The time difference to the live broadcast is displayed next to the buffer bar gt For live transmissions live Timeshift menu ag Go to the live broadcast gt Playback pause Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Radio Entertainment AH Next track KI Previous track D Fast forward KA Reverse Y y Automatic timeshift deactivated activated Automatic timeshift When the function is activated audio playback is stopped autom
160. e duced lane stability during braking a longer braking distance and altered self steering properties lt Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of the tire Reduce speed and stop otherwise pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident Do not continue driving and contact your service center lt Message when not reset lt lt J 1 _ The warning light lights up yellow A e Check Control message is displayed The system may not have been reset although a wheel was changed L Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the system refer to page 97 System limits The system does not function properly if it has not been reset e g it may identify a tire as flat in spite of the fact that the tire is filled to the correct inflation pressure The tire pressure depends on the temperature of the tire An increase in the tire temperature e g while driving or due to sunlight increases the tire inflation pressure The tire pressure decreases when the tire temperature drops In case of severe temperature drops this behav ior may lead to a warning on account of the de fined warning limits Malfunction The small warning light flashes in yel 714 lowand then lights up continuously the larger warning light comes on in yellow On the Control Display the tires are shown in gray and a message ap pears No flat tire can be detected I
161. e other inserts In the cargo area press the handles up and fold the transport bag down fully More information on the various inserts availa ble can be obtained from your service center 123 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Storage compartments Storage compartments Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Glove compartment Opening Pull the handle arrow 1 The light in the glove compartment switches on Close the glove compartment again im mediately Close the glove compartment immediately af ter use while driving otherwise injury may oc cur during accidents Closing Fold up the cover Locking Lock with a key arrow 2 124 If you hand out the remote control without the integrated key refer to page 32 such as ata hotel the glove compartment cannot be un locked USB interface for data transfer Port for importing and exporting data such as music collections refer to page 177 on USB devices Observe the following when connecting gt Do not us
162. e tire damage and acci dents could occur lt These tire inflation pressures can also be found on the driver s side door pillar when the driver s door is open Tire inflation pressures for driving above 100 mph or 160 km h Adjust the tire inflation pressures To drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph 160 km h adjust pressures to the re spective tire inflation pressures listed on the following pages in the column for traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph or 160 km h Otherwise tire damage and acci dents could occur Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed Observe all national and local maximum speed limits otherwise violations of the laws could occur The maximum permissible speed for these tire pressures is 100 mph 160 km h Do not exceed Tire inflation pressures Z4 sDrive28i Tire size Pressure specifications in bar PSI Traveling speeds of up Traveling speeds in to 100 mph 160 km h cluding those exceed ing 100 mph 160 km h All pressure specifications in the table are in dicated in bar psi with cold tires Cold ambient temperature Without Sport Package 225 45 R17 91 V RSC 2 5 36 3 0 44 25136 3 0 44 225 45 R 17 91 HM S RSC 225 45 R 17 94 V M S XL RSC Front 225 45 R 1791 V RSC 2 5 36 2 5 36 Rear 255 40 R 17 94 V RSC 2 7139 2 7139 Front 225 40 R 18 88 W RSC 2 5 36 2 5 36 Rear 255 35 R 18 90 W RSC 2 9 42 2 9 42 Front 225 35 R 19 88 Y XL RSC 2 5 3
163. e appears on the mobile phone display 5 Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display 6 You are prompted by the iDrive or mobile phone to enter the same Bluetooth pass key Enter the passkey and confirm or Compare the control number on the vehi cle display with the control number on the mobile phone display Confirm the control number on the mobile phone and in the ve hicle OK 7 Select the functions for which the mobile phone is to be used 8 OK 196 If the pairing was successful the mobile phone appears at the top of the list of mobile phones The functions supported by the mobile phone and audio device are displayed as symbols when paired White symbol the function is active Gray symbol the function is inactive Symbol Function ag Telephone a Additional telephone n Audio source Four mobile phones can be paired with the ve hicle at once Three mobile phones can be connected with the vehicle at once If pairing was unsuccessful What to do if re fer to page 197 Following the initial pairing gt The mobile phone is detected connected in the vehicle within a short period of time when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on gt The phone book entries of the telephone stored on the SIM card or mobile phone are transmitted to the vehicle after detec tion depending on the mobile phone gt Four mobile phones can be paired Specific settings
164. e force when plugging the con nector into the USB interface gt Do not connect devices such as fans or lights to the USB interface gt Do not connect a USB hard drive Do not use the USB interface to recharge external devices Center armrest Storage compartment The center armrest contains either two cu pholders a compartment or the cover for the snap in adapter depending on the equipment version Details on this mobile phone cradle refer to page 203 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Storage compartments Controls Locking the storage compartment When you lock the vehicle from the outside the storage compartment in the center armrest is locked as well Opening gt hk Fold the center armrest up see arrow Connection for an external audio device You can connect an external audio device such as aCD or MP3 player and play audio tracks over the car s loudspeaker system gt AUX IN port refer to page 182 gt USB audio interface refer to page 183 Storage compartments inside the vehicle No non slip mats on the dashboard Do not use non slip materials such as non slip mats on the dashboard or it could be damaged by the substances in the materials lt The following compartments are available de pending on how your vehicle is equipped In the doors To open fold open the cover In the center console One open storage compartment or ashtray In the p
165. e or rain sensor Press button arrow The LED in the button lights up Setting speed for intermittent wipe or sensitivity of the rain sensor Turn the thumbwheel Do not use the washer system at freezing temperatures Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the windshield oth erwise your vision could be obscured For this reason use antifreeze Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is empty otherwise you could damage the pump 64 Press the button again arrow The LED in the button goes out Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes Deactivate the rain sensor when passing through an automatic car wash otherwise damage could be caused by undesired wiper activation Cleaning the windshield and headlights Pull the lever arrow The system sprays washer fluid on the wind shield and activates the wipers briefly When the vehicle lighting system is switched on the headlights are cleaned at regular and appropriate intervals Windshield washer nozzles The windshield washer nozzles are heated au tomatically while the engine is running or the ignition is switched on Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Driving Controls Washer fluid General information Antifreeze for washer fluid Antifreeze is flammable and can cause injuries if used improperly Therefore keep it away from sources of igni tion Only keep it in the
166. e seat is empty The front and side airbags on the front passenger side are not activated Most child seats are detected by the system Es pecially the child seats required by NHTSA at the time that the vehicle was manufac tured After installing a child seat make sure that the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the front passenger airbags are not acti vated gt The indicator lamp does not light up when for example a person of sufficient size and in a correct sitting position is detected on the seat The front and front passenger air bags on the front passenger side are acti vated 94 Operational readiness of airbag system When the ignition refer to page 58 is switched on the warning lamp comes on briefly to indi cate that the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners are operational Airbag system malfunction gt The warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on gt Warning light remains permanently on Have the airbag system checked without delay if there is a malfunction In the event of a malfunction in the airbag sys tem have it checked without delay otherwise there is the risk that the system will not func tion as intended even if a sufficiently severe accident occurs lt Flat Tire Monitor FTM The concept The system detects a pressure loss in a tire on the basis of speed differences betw
167. e transmission lock even if there is no malfunction involving the transmission Otherwise there is the danger that the transmission lock will be engaged au tomatically during towing Adhere to the towing speed and distance Do not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph 50 km h and a towing distance of 30 miles 50 km or damage to the transmission can occur lt Blocked parking brake The parking brake cannot be released manually When the parking brake is blocked do not tow the vehicle or else it may be damaged 254 Contact your service center lt Follow the towing instructions Follow all towing instructions or vehicle damage or accidents may occur lt gt Make sure that the ignition is switched on otherwise the low beams tail lights turn signals and windshield wipers may be un available gt Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle tilted as the front wheels could turn gt When the engine is stopped there is no power assist Consequently more force needs to be applied when braking and steering Larger steering wheel movements are re quired gt The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed otherwise it will not be possible to control the vehicle response Secure the vehicle against rolling off Apply the parking brake after towing and secure the vehicle against rolling off if neces Sary Have the operability of transmission position P checked by the service center
168. e vehicle in which these technical data could Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Notes ss become associated with a specific person in combination with other information such as an accident report damage to the vehicle wit ness accounts etc possibly with the involve ment of an authorized expert Additional functions that are contractually agreed with the customer such as vehicle lo calization in the event of an emergency permit the transfer of certain vehicle data out of the vehicle Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data re corder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situa tions such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in under standing how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as gt How various systems in your vehicle were operating gt Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were fastened gt How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal gt How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better under standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if
169. e with a damaged tire 1 Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers 2 Donot exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h 3 Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset Reset the system Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load and the driving style and conditions For a vehicle containing an average load the possible driving distance is approx 50 miles 80 km When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire its handling characteristics change e g re duced lane stability during braking a longer braking distance and altered self steering properties Adjust your driving style accord ingly Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv ing over obstacles e g curbs potholes etc Because the possible driving distance de pends on how the vehicle is used during the trip the actual distance may be smaller or greater depending on the driving speed road conditions external temperature cargo load etc Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Safety Controls A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics e g r
170. ears in the dis play accompanied by the brightness set ting and the word SET 2 Press button 2 wv tt isisieieie min max Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Lamps Controls 3 Push button 1 up or down to select the de Reading lights sired brightness level 4 Press button 2 The display again shows the external tem perature and the time Interior lights The interior lamps footwell lamps entry lamps cargo area lamp and courtesy lamps are controlled automatically The reading lamps are located next to the inte rior lamp To switch on and off press the but ton The LEDs for the courtesy lamps are set in the door handles and illuminate the ground in front of the doors To avoid draining the battery all lights inside the car are switched off about 8 minutes after the ignition is switched off Start Stop button refer to page 57 Switching interior lights on off manually Interior lamps To switch on and off press the button To switch off the interior lamps footwell lamps entry lamps and courtesy lamps per manently press the button for the front interior lamps for about 3 seconds 91 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Safety Safety Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes e
171. eavy duty grease removers fuel or such this could lead to surface damage lt Safety belts Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety No chemical cleaning Do not clean chemically this can destroy the webbing lt Use only a mild soapy solution with the safety belts clipped into their buckles 259 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Mobility Care Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts until they are dry Carpets and floor mats No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats carpets and any other objects out of the area of motion of the pedals otherwise the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas tened again when they are returned after being removed such as for cleaning lt Floor mats can be removed from the passen ger compartment for cleaning When returning the floor mats secure them again to prevent slipping If the floor carpets are very dirty clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner To prevent matting of the carpet rub back and forth in the direction of travel only Cleaning the interior When cleaning the interior do not move both seats all the way fo
172. ed in the destination list and is highlighted 5 Turn the controller until the intermediate destination is located at the desired loca tion in the list 6 Press the controller Starting the trip 1 After all intermediate destinations are en tered highlight the first destination If the second destination for example is highlighted when destination guidance is started the first destination is skipped 2 Start guidance This symbol marks the active leg of the trip Storing a trip Up to 30 trips can be stored in the trip list If necessary delete existing trips to be able to store new trips 1 Open Options 2 Store trip 3 Enteraname for the trip 4 OK Selecting a stored trip 1 Navigation 2 Stored trips 3 Select a stored trip 4 Start guidance 149 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Navigation Destination entry Changing the trip direction Intermediate destinations are displayed in re verse order in the list Map Guidance Open Options ey eS Reverse order of trip dest Intermediate destination options 1 Map 2 Guidance 3 Display all trip destinations 4 Select an intermediate destination gt Edit destination gt Reposition dest in the trip move an intermediate destination to another po sition in the list gt Delete dest in the trip gt Go to next dest in the trip Some options are not avai
173. ed memory button 1 or 2 the LED goes out If the M button is pressed accidentally Press the button again The LED goes M out Retrieving the position Do not retrieve the memory setting while driving Do not retrieve the memory setting while driv ing aS an unexpected movement of the seat or steering wheel could result in an accident 51 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Adjusting Comfort function 1 Open the driver s door or switch on the radio ready state refer to page 57 2 Briefly press the desired memory but ton 1 or 2 The seat is automatically moved to the stored position The procedure stops when a switch for adjust ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed Safety mode 1 Close the driver s door and switch the igni tion on or off refer to page 57 2 Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 until the adjustment procedure is com pleted Mirrors Exterior mirrors General information The mirror on the passenger side is more curved than the driver s mirror Estimating distances correctly Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear Do not estimate the distance to the traffic behind you based on what you see in the mirror as this will increase your risk of an accident lt The setting for the exterior mirrors is stored for the remote control currently in use The stored position is called up automatically when the vehicle is un
174. een the in dividual wheels during a trip In the event of pressure loss the rolling cir cumference changes and thus the rotating speed of the affected wheel This change is detected and is reported as a flat tire Functional requirements The system must have been initialized when the tire inflation pressure was correct other Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Safety Controls wise reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en sured Initialize the system after each correc tion of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change System limits Sudden tire damage Sudden serious tire damage caused by external influences cannot be indicated in ad vance lt A natural even pressure loss in all four tires cannot be detected The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations gt When the system has not been initialized gt When driving on a snowy or slippery road surface gt Sporty driving style slip in the drive wheels high lateral acceleration gt When driving with snow chains Status display The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display e g whether or not the FTM is active 1 Vehicle Info 2 Vehicle status 3 1 Flat Tire Monitor The status is displayed Initialization The initialization process adopts the set infla tion tire pressures as reference values for the detection of a
175. elp Additional commands for the help dialog gt Help with examples information about the current operating options and the most im portant commands for them are an nounced gt Help with voice activation information about the principle of operation for the voice activation system is announced Example playing back a CD Via the main menu The commands of the menu items are spoken out loud in the same way as they are selected via the controller 1 Switch on the Entertainment sound output if necessary 2 Press the button on the steering wheel 3 gt C D and multimedia The medium last played is played back 4 C D 5 gt C D drive The CD is played back 28 6 Press the button on the steering wheel again to select a specific track 7 gt Track lt e g CD track 4 Via short commands Playback of the CD can also be started using a short command 1 Switch on the Entertainment sound output if necessary 2 Press the button on the steering wheel 3 gt C D drive Track e g CD track 4 Setting the voice dialog You can set whether the system should use the standard dialog or a shorter version In the shorter variant of the voice dialog the announcements from the system are issued in an abbreviated form On the Control Display Settings Language Units Speech mode wy S Select the setting Default Short Adjusting the volume Turn the volume button
176. els via an electro mechanical mechanism When the vehicle is rolling or being driven the parking brake acts on the disc brakes of the front and rear wheels via the hydraulic brake system Setting R XC N 7 Pull the switch The parking brake is set The indicator lamp in the instrument PARK cluster and the LED on the switch light up red The parking brake is set Indicator light in Canadian models To set the parking brake the remote control does not need to be in the ignition lock While driving If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to engage the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion pull the switch for an extended period the vehicle brakes forcefully while the switch is being pulled The indicator lamp in the instrument PARK cluster lights up red a sound is issued and the brake lights light up Indicator light in Canadian models When the vehicle is braked almost to a halt ap prox 2 mph 3 km h the parking brake remains set Releasing Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children for exam ple cannot start the engine or release the parking brake The parking brake can only be released while the ignition is switched on or the engine Is run ning 61 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Driving Manual transmission Press the switch of the parking brake De
177. emory refer to Seat and mirror memory 51 Menus of iDrive operat ing 20 Menus refer to iDrive operat ing concept 21 Message list traffic bulle tins 155 Messages 208 Microfilter for air condi tioner 111 Microfilter with automatic cli mate control 114 Minimum tread depth tires 233 Mirror mirror memory refer to Seat and mirror mem ory 51 Mirrors 52 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Everything from A to Z Reference Mirrors Automatic Curb Monitor 52 Mirrors exterior mirrors 52 Mirrors folding in before driving into a car wash 53 Mirrors heating 53 Mirrors interior mirror 53 Mobile communication devi ces in the vehicle 131 Mobile phone installation lo cation refer to Center arm rest 124 Mobile phone refer to Tele phone 194 Modifications technical refer to Safety 7 Monitor refer to Control Dis play 20 MP3 player 182 Multimedia 172 Music collection 177 Music search 179 Music storing 177 N Navigation 140 Navigation data 140 Navigation data updat ing 140 Navigation system destina tion entry by voice 148 Nets refer to Storage com partments 125 Neutral cleaner care 259 New wheels and tires 234 Notes 6 211 Nozzles refer to Air vents 109 Nozzles refer to Ventila tion 111 115 O OBD Onboard Diagnos tics 244 Odometer 73 Office 205 Oil additives 240 Oil change interval service requirements 80 Oil consumption 238
178. enance procedures and le gally mandated inspections are displayed tE Vehicle status 4 Select an entry to call up detailed informa tion Symbols Description No service is currently re quired The deadline for service ora legally mandated inspection is approaching The service deadline has al ready passed ering appointmen es Enter the dates for the required inspections Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set correctly on the Control Display Vehicle Info 2 Vehicle status 3 Service required ES Vehicle status 4 8 Vehicle inspection ok Engine oil ok Front brake pads OK Rear brake pads OK Brake fluid OK Vehicle check OK Vehicle inspection 83 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Displays 6 Create the settings 7 Confirm The entered date is stored Automatic Service Request Data regarding the maintenance status or le gally mandated inspections of the vehicle are automatically transmitted to your service cen ter before a service due date You can check when your service center was notified 1 Vehicle Info 2 Vehicle status 3 Open Options 4 Last Service Request Check Control The concept The Check Control monitors vehicle functions and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys tems monitored Such Check Control messages involve indica tor or warning lamps in the instrument cluster and in some circumstan
179. ent location and the destination is displayed on the map Settings for the map view The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use Navigation Map Open Options Settings To set the map view vaa WN gt Day night mode Select and create the necessary settings depending on the light conditions Traffic conditions gray map active the setting is disregarded gt Satellite images Depending on availability and resolution satellite images are displayed at scales of approx 1 mile to 600 miles 2 km to 1 000 km gt Perspective view in 3D Prominent areas that are contained in the navigation data are displayed on the map in 3D gt Traffic conditions gray map The map is optimized for displaying traffic bulletins refer to page 156 Symbols for the Points of Interest are no longer displayed Map view for splitscreen The map view can be selected for the split screen independently from the main screen 1 Open Options 2 Split screen 3 Move the controller to the right repeatedly until the split screen is selected 4 Select Split screen content or the scale 5 Select the map view Arrow display Map facing north Map direction of travel Map view with perspective Position VV VV VV Exit ramp view selected blind drive ways are displayed three dimension ally gt Traffic conditions gray map 6 Tochange the scale select the split
180. er hold down the memory button and press and release the button on the hand held transmitter several times for 2 seconds Controls Prior to operation Before operating a unit with the Universal Garage Door Opener ensure that there are no people animals or objects in the range of movement of the system otherwise there is a risk of injury or damage Digital compass 1 Adjustment button 2 Display The display shows you the main or secondary compass direction in which you are driving Operating concept You can call up a number of functions by pressing the adjustment button with a pointed 118 Also follow the safety instructions of the hand held transmitter lt The system such as the garage door can be operated using the button on the interior rear view mirror with the engine running or the igni tion switched on When you are within the re ception range of the system press and hold the button until the function is initiated The LED on the interior rearview mirror lights up continuously while the radio signal is being transmitted Deleting stored functions Press the right and left buttons on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for approx 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly All stored functions are deleted The functions cannot be deleted individually object such as a ball point pen The following adjustment options are displayed one after the other depending on how long you keep the
181. er of injury from protrud ing parts when the hood is open lt Closing the hood Close the hood from a height of ap prox 16 in 40 cm with momentum It must be clearly heard to engage Hood open when driving If you see any signs that the hood is not completely closed while driving pull over im mediately and close it securely lt Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear otherwise injuries may result Checking the oil level General information Engine oil consumption depends on the driv ing style and the conditions of use A highly sporty driving style for example results in considerably higher engine oil consumption Therefore regularly check the engine oil level after refueling The concept The car is equipped with an electronic engine oil level check When the oil quantity reaches minimum level a Check Control message is displayed Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Engine compartment Requirements gt The engine must be running and warm af 1 ter the vehicle has been driven for at least 6 2 miles 10 km gt The vehicle is stopped or being driven ona level roadway 2 Display in the instrument cluster 5 INACTIVE mn max 1 Press button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate 1 Oijllevel OK symbol appears in the display accompa 2 Oil level is being checked This can take nied by the
182. eries equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Universal garage door opener The concept The universal garage door opener can be used to operate up to 3 functions in remote control led systems such as garage door drives or lighting systems The universal garage door opener replaces up to 3 different hand held transmitters To operate it the buttons on the interior rearview mirror must be programmed for the desired functions The hand held trans mitter for the system is needed for the pro gramming procedure During programming During programming and before activat ing a device using the Universal Garage Door Opener ensure that there are no people ani mals or objects in the range of movement of the remote controlled device otherwise there is a risk of injury or damage Also follow the safety instructions of the hand held transmitter lt Before selling the vehicle delete the stored functions for security reasons 116 Compatibility fa If this symbol is printed on the packag ing or in the operating instructions of the system being operated the system is generally
183. ervice requirements can be read 3 Press button 2 out from the remote control by the service heed 4 Use button 1 to scroll through the individ specialist ual service items Data regarding the maintenance status or le gally mandated inspections of the vehicle are automatically transmitted to your service cen ter before a service due date Automatic Serv ice Request refer to page 217 The remaining driving distance or the due date can be displayed individually for certain main tenance procedures gt SERVICE INFO 1 Switch on the ignition 2 Press button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display accompa nied by the words SERVICE INFO 81 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Displays Possible displays 1 Button for selecting functions 5 Front brake pads 2 Service requirements 6 Rear brake pads 3 Engine oil 7 Brake fluid 4 Roadworthiness test The sequence of displayed service items may vary The data for the next service appointment is shown first 82 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Displavs Weenies More information More information on the scope of service re quired can be displayed on the Control Dis play 1 Vehicle Info 2 Vehicle status s Vehicle Info l Onboard info v Trip computer Vehicle status 3 Service required Required maint
184. ess the button on the steering wheel or Bs Accept LS Incoming call D 4989123456789 calling Device Handy 1 Reject la Press the button on the steering wheel or 1 Telephone 2 End call tS Active calls AW End call Ss 4989123456789 K 00 55 ae on Entering a phone number 1 Telephone 2 Dial number 3 Select the digits individually 4 y Select the symbol Ss 08912 The phone number can also be entered by voice Calls with multiple parties You can switch between calls or connect two calls to a single conference call These func tions must be supported by the mobile phone and service provider This function might have to be activated by the service provider and the mobile phone must be adjusted accordingly 199 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Communication Telephone If a second call comes in during an ongoing call a call waiting signal is sounded A Accept The call is accepted and the existing call is put on hold Establishing a second call Establish an additional call during an active call 1 Telephone 2 Active calls 3 S3 Hold The existing call is put on hold A SF Active calls S ave Hold Busters 4 Dial the new phone number or select it from a list St Return The call on hold is resumed Switching between two calls hold call The active call is displayed in color The
185. essure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pres sure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel ef 99 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Safety ficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driv er s responsibility to maintain correct tire pres sure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction exists When the mal function indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the in stallation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly
186. ew remote controls You can obtain new remote controls from your service center Loss of the remote controls Lost remote controls can be blocked by your service center Personal Profile The concept You can set several of your vehicle s functions to suit your personal needs and preferences Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Opening and closing Controls gt The settings are automatically saved in the profile currently activated gt The remote control used is detected when the vehicle is unlocked and the stored pro file is called up gt Your personal settings will be recognized and called up again even if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by someone else with another remote control The individual settings are stored for a maxi mum of four remote controls They are stored for two remote controls if Comfort Access is in use Personal Profile settings The following functions and settings can be stored in a profile More information on the settings can be found under gt Assigning the programmable memory but tons refer to page 24 gt Response of the central locking system when the car is being unlocked refer to page 34 gt Automatic locking of the vehicle refer to page 37 gt Automatic retrieval of the driver s seat and exterior mirror positions after unlocking refer to page 36 gt Triple turn signal activation refer to page 62 gt Settings for the
187. ff if the light switch is in position 0 2 or 3 Switch on the parking lights if necessary switch position 1 Parking lamps low beams headlamp control Parking lamps Switch position D Q the vehicle lamps light up on all sides e g for parking Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe riods otherwise the battery may become dis charged and it would then be impossible to start the engine When parking it is preferable to switch on the one sided roadside parking lamps refer to page 89 Low beams Switch position ZD with the ignition switched on the low beams light up Welcome lights When parking the vehicle leave the switch in position ZD or 40 the parking and interior lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un locked Activating deactivating the welcome lamps 1 Settings 2 Lighting 3 Welcome light 1 kere Lighting Pathway light O Triple turn signal a N O Daytime running lamps A ms EY Welcome light T The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use 87 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Lamps Headlight courtesy delay feature The low beams stay lit for a short while after the ignition is switched off if the lights are switched off and the headlight flasher is switched on Setting the duration 1 Settings 2 Lighting 3 Pathway light s _ amp GF Lighting Pathway light Os O Triple turn s
188. flap Opening 1 Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap 2 Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise 3 Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap Closing Fit the fuel cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click Do not pinch the retaining strap Do not pinch the retaining strap attached to the cap otherwise the cap cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape A message is displayed if the cap is loose or missing Manually unlocking fuel filler flap In the event of a malfunction you can release the fuel filler flap manually Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Refueling Pull the button with the fuel pump symbol in the cargo area This releases the fuel filler flap Observe the following when refueling Do not overfill the fuel tank Do not overfill the fuel tank otherwise escaping fuel may harm the environment or damage the vehicle lt Handling fuels Obey safety regulations posted at the gas station lt When refueling insert the filler nozzle com pletely into the filler pipe Avoid lifting the filler nozzle while filling the tank as that would lead to gt Premature pump shutoff gt Reduced efficiency of the fuel vapor re covery system The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time Fuel tank capacity Approx 14 5 gallons 55 liters 225 Online Edition for Part no 01 40
189. for telephone or mo bile phone refer to Snap in adapter 203 Cradle for telephone or mo bile phone refer to Snap in adapter in center armrest storage compartment 124 Cruise control 105 Cruise control malfunc tion 107 Cupholder 126 Curb weight refer to Weights 264 Current location storing 144 D Damage tires 233 Dashboard lighting refer to Instrument lighting 90 Dashboard refer to Cock pit 14 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Everything from A to Z Reference Data technical dimen sions 264 Data technical filling capaci ties 265 Data technical weights 264 Date date format 79 Date setting 79 Daytime running lights 88 DBC Dynamic Brake Con trol 101 DCC refer to Cruise con trol 105 Defogging windows 111 Defroster rear win dow 111 114 Defrosting windows 111 Destination entry via the ad dress book 144 Destination guidance 151 Destination guidance with in termediate destinations 149 Destination input naviga tion 142 Digital clock 73 Digital compass 118 Digital radio 165 Dimensions 264 Dimming mirrors 53 Directional indicators refer to Turn signals 62 Display lighting refer to In strument lighting 90 Display refer to Control Dis play 20 Displays and controls 14 Displays care 260 Displays cleaning 260 Displays refer to Instrument cluster 16 Disposal coolant 241 Disposal remote control bat tery 41 Disposal vehicle
190. for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Tire inflation pressure Information for your safety It is not merely the tires service life but also driving comfort and to a great extent driving safety that depend on the condition of the tires and the maintenance of the specified tire pres sure Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Regularly check the tire inflation pres sure and correct it as needed at least twice a month and before a long trip If you fail to ob serve this precaution you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pressures a condition that may not only compromise your vehicle s driving stability but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident Checking the pressure Tires naturally lose pressure uniformly across all four tires Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold This means after a maximum of 1 25 miles 2 km driving or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours When the tires are warm the tire inflation pressure is higher 228 Tires warm up during driving and the tire infla tion pressure increases as the temperature rises The tire inflation pressure specifications
191. ft free 111 115 Ventilation refer to Climate control 109 Vents refer to Air vents 109 Version of the navigation data 140 Video playback 174 Voice activation naviga tion 148 Voice activation short com mands 266 Voice activation system 27 Volume setting 162 W Warning and indicator lamps 17 Warning messages refer to Check Control 84 Warning signal volumes 163 Warning triangle 252 Washer wiper system 63 Washer fluid 65 Washing vehicle 257 Waste tray refer to Ash tray 120 Water on roads 131 Wear indicator in tire 233 Weights 264 Welcome lights 87 Wheelbase refer to Dimen sions 264 Wheel change 248 Wheels and tires 228 Wheels changing 234 Wheels Flat Tire Monitor FTM 94 Wheels Tire Pressure Moni tor TPM 96 Width refer to Dimen sions 264 Wind deflector 46 Window convenient opera tion 35 Windows 42 Windows defrosting and de fogging automatic climate control 114 Windows defrosting and re moving condensation air conditioner 111 Windows pinch protec tion 43 Windshield cleaning 64 Windshield defrosting and defogging air condi tioner 111 Windshield defrosting and defogging automatic cli mate control 114 Windshield defrosting refer to Defrosting windows 111 Windshield wash 63 Windshield washer fluid 65 Windshield wash nozzles 64 Windshield wash washer fluid 65 Windshield wiper blades changing 245 Windshield wiper refer to Washer wi
192. g bolt lock 249 Lock buttons doors refer to Locking 38 Locking from the inside 38 Locking from the outside 35 Locking setting the confirma tion signals 36 Locking the vehicle from the inside 37 Locking the vehicle from the outside 34 Locking without remote con trol refer to Comfort Ac cess 39 Low beams 87 Low beams automatic refer to High beam Assistant 89 Lower back support refer to Lumbar support 49 Lug bolt lock 249 Lumbar support 49 M M S automatic transmission 7 gear 70 M S automatic transmission 8 gear 67 Maintenance 243 Maintenance require ments 243 Maintenance service require ments 80 Maintenance system BMW 243 Malfunction door lock 37 Malfunction fuel filler flap 224 Malfunction parking brake 62 Malfunction warnings refer to Check Control 84 Manual air distribution 111 Manual mode 7 gear auto matic transmission 70 Manual mode 8 gear auto matic transmission 67 Manual operation door lock 37 Manual operation driver s door 37 Manual operation fuel filler flap 224 Manual operation transmis sion lock 71 Manual transmission 65 Map destination entry 147 Map display in black and white 156 Map in split screen 155 Map view 153 Marking on approved tires 235 Marking run flat tires 234 Master key refer to Remote control with integrated key 32 Maximum cooling 113 Maximum speed winter tires 235 Medical kit refer to First aid kit 252 M
193. gation bar overview Symbol Function ka kta cp Change the list view T Select the category c Direct channel entry 6 Timeshift vy y Open the My Favorites cate gory open a favorite yt Manage the favorites A Traffic Jump The functions of the navigation bar symbols can also be stored on the programmable mem ory buttons refer to page 25 Managing a subscription To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the channels you must have reception It is usually at its best when you have an unobstructed view of the sky The channel name is displayed in the status line Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 nanneils The Unsubscribed Channels category contains all disabled channels 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 Ke me Category Satellite radio xa 8 Snow Patrol amp Category Chasing Cars ce he All channels YF 001 Sirius Hits 1 42 002 Starlite 003 Sirius Love 004 Movin EZ 4 Select the Unsubscribed Channels cate gory 5 Select the desired channel The phone number and an electronic serial number ESN are displayed 6 Select the phone number to have the channel enabled tS Subscribe to Sirius Call Sirius to subscribe ESN 020 373 371 411 Sy 1 888 539 SIRIUS You can unsubscribe from the channels again via this phone number Unsubscribing from channels 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 Open Options 4 Man
194. ge will appear on the Control Dis play Check the coolant level refer to page 241 Check the oil level refer to page 238 14 The vehicle inclination may cause the display to vary Notes on refueling refer to page 224 Range After the reserve range is reached gt A message is briefly displayed on the Con trol Display Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Displays Controls gt The remaining range is shown on the com based on your driving style over the last puter 18 miles 30 km and the current fuel supply gt When a dynamic driving style is used such as when corners are taken rapidly engine Average speed functions are not ensured Periods in which the vehicle was parked and the engine was switched off manually are not Below a range of approx 30 miles 50 km the l i included in the average speed calculations message is displayed continuously With the trip computer refer to page 75 you can have the average speed displayed for an At the latest refuel at a range of additional distance 30 miles 50 km otherwise the engine function is not ensured and damage may occur Refuel promptly To reset the average speed press the button on the turn indicator lever for approx 2 sec onds Computer Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption is calculated for Displays in the instrument cluster the time during which the engine is running The average consumption i
195. ghlight the symbol 4 Press the controller twice Volume of spoken instructions Turn the volume button during the spoken in structions until the desired volume is set Settings are stored for the remote control cur rently in use Saving the spoken instructions on the programmable memory buttons The function for switching the spoken instruc tions on off can be stored on a programmable memory button refer to page 24 for quick ac cess Map view Selecting the map view 1 Navigation 2 Map 153 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 EW eF 1ielamme Destination guidance Ata glance Function bar Route section with traffic obstruction Traffic sign for traffic obstruction 1 2 3 4 Planned route 5 Current location 6 Upper status field 7 Lower status field Lines in the map Streets and routes are displayed in different colors and styles depending on their classifica tion Dashed lines represent railways and ferry connections Country borders are indicated by thin lines Traffic obstructions Small triangles along the planned route indi cate route sections with traffic obstructions depending on the map scale The direction of the triangles indicates the direction of the ob struction The traffic signs indicate the significance of the obstruction gt Red traffic sign the obstruction affects the planned route or direction gt Grey traffic sign the obstruction
196. gt this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Using the door lock A IA Ea Zy Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if there are people in it as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl edge lt Remove the key before pulling the door handle Before pulling the outside door handle remove the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and the key Manual operation If an electrical malfunction occurs unlock or lock the driver s door using the integrated key in the door lock Opening and closing from the inside Take the remote control with you People or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in side Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside lt oN Locking and unlocking Press the button The doors and the trunk lid are locked or unlocked when the front doors are closed but they are not secured against theft The fuel filler flap remains unlocked Automatic locking The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use 1 Settings 2 Door locks 3 Select the desired function gt Lock if no door is o
197. he message is shown Satellite radio vr Favorite alert fa Proud Mary 1969 All Channels i Sirius Hits 1 002 StarLite Sirius Love Movin EZ i ie 001 wi Favorites ka The displayed favorite is played 169 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Entertainment _ Radio If there is no message the system changes to the My Favorites category All favorites cur rently being broadcast can be selected from a list Managing the favorites Activating deactivating the favorites Favorites can be activated and deactivated globally and individually 1 Satellite radio 2 Yt Manage favorites 3 Select Activate alert or the desired favor ites The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use Deleting favorites 1 Satellite radio yt Manage favorites Highlight the desired favorite Open Options ae Delete entry Traffic Jump Traffic and weather information for a selected region is broadcast every few minutes Selecting a region Radio Satellite radio Open Options Set jump as Sh a Select the desired region The region is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Activating deactivating the jump 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 fA Jump to 170 Information for the selected region is broad cast as soon as it is available A new panel opens Canceling the Traffic Jump Cancel Symbol Meaning vas Infor
198. he se lected category are displayed in the map view as symbols The display depends on the scale of the map and the category Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Destination entry Navigation Destination entry via the Concierge service A connection is established to the Concierge service refer to page 217 1 Navigation 2 Enter address 3 Open Options 4 BMW Assist dest entry Displaying Points of Interest in the map To display symbols of the Points of Interest in the map view 1 Navigation 2 Map 3 Open Options 4 Display Points of Interest 5 Select the setting Destination entry by map Selecting the destination 1 Navigation 2 Map The current position of the vehicle is dis played on the map 3 Interactive map 4 Select the destination with crosshairs gt To change the scale turn the control ler gt To shift the map move the controller in the required direction gt To shift the map diagonally move the controller in the required direction and turn it Specifying the street If the system does not recognize the street one of the following pieces of information is displayed gt Astreet name in the vicinity gt The county gt The coordinates of the destination Additional functions Additional functions are available on the inter active map after the controller is pressed Cy Selected position 48 08
199. he system after adjusting the tire infla tion pressure and after changing a tire or wheel Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Safety Controls Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the system will operate properly Status display MENU Press the button The start menu opens Vehicle Info Vehicle status TPM The status is displayed a amp w wY Status indicator on the Control Display The tire and system status Is indicated by the color of the tires TPM takes into account that tire pressures change while the vehicle is being driven All wheels are green The system is active and issues warnings in case of deviations from the tire inflation pres sures stored last TPM active appears on the Control Display One wheel is yellow Flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in the indicated tire A message appears on the Control Display All wheels are yellow gt Flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in several tires gt The system was not reset after a wheel change and issues warnings in case of de viations from the tire inflation pressures stored last gt A flat tire in one or more tires while the sys tem Is being reset A message appears on the Control Display The wheels are gray The system cannot detect a flat tire Possible reasons for this gt TPM is being reset gt Disturbance by systems or devices with the same radi
200. hen using the mobile phone via the vehicle i nath bile ph note the operating instructions of the mobile i S ll aie phone 1 Depending on the mobile phone remove the protective cap from the antenna con Installation position nector and from the USB connection of the In the center armrest mobile phone 2 With the buttons facing up slide the mo Inserting removing the snap in bile phone up toward the electrical con adapter tacts and press it down until it engages 1 Press button 1 and remove the cover The battery is charged beginning with the l radio ready state of the vehicle 2 Insert the snap in adapter at the front ar row 1 and press down arrow 2 until it en gages 203 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Communication Telephone Removing the mobile phone VWWO962Z0AW Press the button and remove the mobile phone 204 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Office Communication Office Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Ata glance General informat
201. here to local regulations General information The sound settings are stored for the remote control currently in use Treble bass balance and fader gt Treble treble adjustment gt Bass depth adjustment gt Balance left right volume distribution gt Fader front rear volume distribution Setting treble bass balance and fader 1 CD Multimedia Radio or Settings 2 Tone Satellite radio Presets Tone 162 3 Select the desired tone settings t Tone Treble Bass uin Balance L i Fader M Equalizer LY Surround Volume settings iE LJ 4 To adjust turn the controller 5 To store press the controller Equalizer Setting for individual audio frequency ranges Adjusting the equalizer 1 CD Multimedia Radio or Settings 2 Tone 3 Equalizer 4 Select the desired setting GF Equalizer 100 Hz 200 Hz 500 Hz 1 KHz 2 kHz 5 kHz 10 kHz 5 To adjust turn the controller 6 To store press the controller Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Tone Entertainment Multi channel playback surround Choose between stereo and multi channel playback surround Setting multi channel playback surround 1 CD Multimedia Radio or Settings 2 Tone 3 Surround 1 V s Tone Treble Bass Balance Fader Equalizer G Surround Volume settings When surround is activated multi channel playback is simul
202. herefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Overview 1 Equipment variant air conditioner 110 3 Air vent the airflow is directed toward the 2 Equipment variant automatic climate con windshield and side windows trol 112 109 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Climate 4 Air vent air for the upper body area The air Supply continuously the levers change thumbwheels increase and decrease the the direction of the airflow 5 Air vent air for the knee area footwell Air conditioner 1 amp wh amp 1 Vent settings 4 Temperature 2 Recirculated air mode 5 Air volume 3 Cooling function 6 Rear window defroster Note Temperature To increase the temperature turn the rotary switch clockwise to wards red For a lower tempera ture turn the rotary switch coun terclockwise towards blue Sufficient ventilation When remaining in the vehicle for an ex tended period of time ensure sufficient exter nal ventilation Do not continuously use recir culated air mode otherwise the air quality in the interior continuously worsens lt Switching cooling function on off Climate control functions in detail y The cooling function cools and dehumidifies the incoming air be fore reheating it as required according to the sm
203. ht Control is a variable headlamp control system that enables dynamic illumina tion of the road surface Depending on the steering angle and other pa rameters the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road Controls Activating Switch position 2 with the ignition switched on Auxiliary function Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Lamps Controls To avoid blinding oncoming traffic the Adap tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv er s side when the vehicle is at a standstill Malfunction j 31 The warning lamp lights up A mes MH sage appears on the Control Display Adaptive Light Control is malfunc tioning or has failed Have the system checked as soon as possible High beams roadside parking lights hn 7 a 5 E N R ee S SN bh G Pac 1 High beams 2 Headlamp flasher 3 Roadside parking lamps Left and right roadside parking lamps There is an additional option of switching on the lamps on the side of the car facing the road when parked Switching on After parking the vehicle press the lever up or down beyond the pressure point for a longer period arrow 3 The roadside parking lights drain the battery Therefore do not leave them on for unduly long periods of time otherwise the battery might not have enough power to start the en gine Switching off Press the lever in the opposite direction to the pressure poin
204. icle life and good economy Engine and differential Always obey the official speed limits Up to 1 200 miles 2 000 km Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speeds gt 4 500 rom and 100 mph 160 km h Do not drive with full throttle operation and do not use the transmission s kickdown mode or Launch Control From 1 200 miles 2 000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased Tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture tires do not achieve their full 130 traction potential until after an initial breaking in period Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles 300 km Brake system Brakes require an initial break in period of ap prox 300 miles 500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake pads and discs Drive cautiously during this break in period Clutch The clutch requires an initial break in period of approx 300 miles 500 km to function at an op timal level During this break in period engage the clutch gently Following part replacement The same breaking in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle s operating life General driving notes Ground clearance Limited ground clearance Note that the Z4 sDrive35 has limited ground clearance for instance when driving into underground parking garages or over ob stacles Otherwise the vehicle may be
205. ies equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Remote control Buttons on the remote control 1 Unlocking 2 Locking 3 Opening the trunk lid General information The vehicle is supplied with two remote con trols with keys Each remote control contains a rechargeable battery that is automatically recharged when it is in the ignition lock while the car is being driven Use each remote control at least twice a year for longer road trips in order to maintain the batteries charge status 32 In vehicles equipped with Comfort Access the remote control contains a replaceable battery refer to page 41 The settings called up and implemented when the vehicle is unlocked depend on which re mote control is used to unlock the vehicle re fer to Personal Profile In addition information about service require ments is stored in the remote control Service data in the remote control refer to page 243 Integrated key Press button 1 and pull out the key The integrated key fits the following locks gt Glove compartment refer to page 124 gt Driver s door refer to page 37 N
206. igation ConnectedDrive Vehicle Info Settings gt To display short information touch the button gt To display detailed information touch the button for an extended period Entering letters and numbers 1 Turn the controller select letters or num bers 2 Select additional letters or numbers if needed 3 OK confirm the entry e Press the controller delete the let ter or number e Press the controller for an extended period delete all letters or numbers L Enter a blank space Switching between letters and numbers Depending on the menu you can switch be tween entering letters and numbers ABc Enter the letters 123 Enter the numbers Switching between upper and lower case letters Depending on the menu you can switch be tween entering uppercase and lowercase let ters A abc Tip controller up reel from upper to lower case letters A ABC Tipcontroller up reel from lower to upper case letters Entry comparison Entering names and addresses choice is nar rowed down with every letter entered and let ters may be added automatically Entries are continuously compared with data stored in the vehicle gt Only those letters are offered during input for which data is available 25 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Ataglance GEIE U E iDrive gt Target search names of locations may be entered in languages available thro
207. ignal O Daytime running lamps O Welcome light 4 Set the duration The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use Automatic headlight control Switch position 2M the low beams are switched on and off automatically e g in tun nels in twilight or if there is precipitation The LED next to the symbol lights up A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on Personal responsibility The automatic headlamp control cannot serve as a Substitute for your personal judg ment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions For example the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather To avoid safety risks you should always switch on the lamps manually under these conditions lt 88 Daytime running lights The daytime running lights light up in posi tion 0 D and 40 After the ignition is switched off the parking lamps light up in po sition DQ Activating deactivating In some countries driving with daytime run ning lights is mandatory for this reason day time running lights cannot be deactivated in these cases Settings Lighting Daytime running lamps oT gt cr Lighting Pathway light 0s O Triple turn signal O Daytime running lamps O Welcome light The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use Adaptive Light Control The concept Adaptive Lig
208. iles gt Map lt Map facing north Map in direction of travek Map perspective view gt Map with automatic scaling Map scale feet Map scale meters e g map scale 100 meters Map scale kilometers e g map scale 5 kilometers Map scale miles e g map scale 5 miles Split screen settings Split screen Switch off the split screen Adjust the split screen Split screen map facing north Split screen current position Switch on splitscreen Turn off split screen Split screen content Split screen map facing north Split screen current position lt 268 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Short commands of the voice activation system WROCI Split screen facing the direction of travel Split screen map in direction of travel Split screen perspective Split screen perspective Split screen expanded intersection zoom Splitscreen Exit ramp view Split screen scale feet Split screen scale feet e g split screen scale 100 feet Split screen scale meters Split screen scale meters e g split screen scale 100 meters Split screen scale kilometers Split screen scale kilometers e g split screen scale 5 kilometers Split screen scale miles Split screen scale miles e g split screen scale 5 miles Split screen highlight the traffic situation Split screen Traffic conditions Split screen
209. ine Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Communication Office Reminders Displaying reminders Reminders of pending appointments and tasks are displayed After an appointment or after a task is due the reminder is no longer dis played 1 Office 2 Reminders 3 Select the desired reminder The corresponding appointment or the task are displayed Using contact data Ata glance Contact data from appointments tasks text messages emails and notes can be stored or selected Displaying contact or selecting phone number 1 Use contact data 2 Display the contact or select the phone number gt Select the contact to display contact details gt Select the phone number to establish a connection directly Storing contact data 1 Use contact data 2 Highlight the phone number or e mail ad dress 3 Open Options 4 Add to existing contact or Store as new contact 212 Reading out loud Text messages e mails appointment entries tasks and notes can be read out loud 1 Select the desired message appointment task or note 2 gt Select the symbol The following options are available during reading gt Pause Interrupt reading Select again to restart reading gt K Back to beginning Start reading the message again from the beginning gt K Select the symbol Go back one paragraph gt gt Select the symbol Skip a paragraph
210. ine toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washing ton DC 20590 You can also obtain other in formation about motor vehicle safety from http Awww safercar gov For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety related defect to Transport Canada Defect Investigations and Recalls may tele Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 _ Notes phone the toll free hotline 1 800 333 0510 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www tc gc ca roadsafety 10 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Notes PO 11 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 ae Ataglance GELE Cockpit Cockpit Vehicle equipment special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and This chapter describes all series equipmentas systems well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations All around the steering wheel 6 7 1 p Opening and closing windows 2 Opening and closing rear win jointly 43 m dows 43 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954
211. iness address or Home address Enter Last name and if necessary First name 9 Store in vehicle Storing the position The current position can be stored in the ad dress book 1 Navigation 2 Open Options 3 Store position as contact or Add position to contact LiG Options FY Split screen Close control display Navigation Store position as contact Add position to contact EY Receive Traffic Info W Dynamic guidance Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Destination entry Navigation 4 Depending on the selection choose an ex isting contact from the list Select the type of address and enter the first and last name 5 Store in vehicle Editing or deleting an address 1 Navigation Address book Highlight the entry Open Options epp Edit in Contacts or Delete entry Using the home address as the destination The home address must be stored Specify the home address refer to page 207 1 Navigation 2 Address book 3 Home i Gy Address book Check My contacts address Home Andreas Angela Hans Juergen Marcus 4 Start guidance Last destinations At a glance The destinations previously entered are stored automatically These destinations can be called up and used as a destination for destination guidance Calling up the last destination 1 Navigation 2 Last destinations Navigation Enter address Ad
212. ing not for ZR tires V speed rating before the R on ZR tires Speed letter Q up to 100 mph 160 km h T up to 118 mph 190 km h H up to 131 mph 210 km h V up to 150 mph 240 km h W up to 167 mph 270 km h Y up to 186 mph 300 km h Tire Identification Number Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U S Department of Transportation DOT code DOT xxxx xxx 0313 xxxx manufacturer code for the tire brand xxx tire size and tire design 0313 tire age Tire age The tire manufacturing date is contained in the tire identification mark DOT 0313 means that the tire was manufactured in the week 3 of 2 013 BMW recommends that you replace all tires af ter 6 years at most even if some tires may last for 10 years Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A DOT Quality Grades Treadwear 232 Traction AAABC Temperature A B C All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 11 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of t
213. ing a contact 1 Select the desired contact 2 Edit contact amp Contact Edit contact amp Bauer amp Melanie 49897654321 fis 49891234567 017088776655 S 4917088776655 3 Change the entries 4 Store contact in vehicle When a contact is edited the changes are not stored on the mobile phone A copy of the en try is stored in the vehicle Selecting the contact as a navigation destination 1 Select the desired contact 2 Select the address When contacts from the mobile phone are used the address may need to be matched to the navigation data contained in the ve hicle In this case Correct the address 3 Start guidance or Add as another destination Checking the address as a destination An address that is to be used for destination guidance must match the navigation data con Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Office Communication tained in the vehicle The address can be checked for this purpose 1 Select the desired contact and highlight the address 2 Open Options 3 Check as destination 4 Correct and store the address if necessary If the address is corrected and stored a copy of it is stored in the vehicle The address is not changed on the mobile phone New contact General information A contact can have up to 8 phone numbers 2 addresses 3 e mail addresses and one Inter net address 1 Office 2 Contacts 3 Open Optio
214. ing power if necessary and then maintains it Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Climate Controls To give the automatic climate control enough time to achieve the set temperature do not switch between different temperature settings in quick succession Maximum heating power can be obtained with the highest setting regardless of the external temperature The lowest setting effects continuous cooling Switching the cooling function on and off The cooling function cools and dehumidifies the incoming air be fore reheating it as required ac cording to the temperature set ting This function is only available while the engine is running The cooling function helps to prevent conden sation on the windows or to remove it quickly Depending on the weather the windshield may fog over briefly when the engine is started The cooling function is switched on automati cally with the AUTO program Maximum cooling The air is cooled as quickly as possible with the engine running The automatic climate control goes into recir culated air mode at the lowest temperature Air flows at maximum rate from the vents for the upper body area You should therefore open the vents for maximum cooling AUTO program The AUTO program automatically adjusts the air distribution to the windshield and side win dows toward the upper body area and into the footwell and knee area The air flow rate and air dis
215. ing the remote control All you need to do is to have the remote con Pull the handle up arrow 1 This corresponds trol with you e g in your jacket pocket to pressing the button 39 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Opening and closing Locking Press on the surface arrow 2 This corresponds to pressing the LOcK but ton To save battery power ensure that the ignition and all electronic systems and or power con sumers are switched off before locking the ve hicle Window and convertible top operation With the ignition in the radio ready state or be yond the windows and the convertible top can be opened and closed when a remote control is located inside the vehicle Unlocking the trunk lid separately Press on the top half of the BMW emblem This corresponds to pressing the button If a remote control accidentally left in the cargo area is detected in the locked vehicle then the trunk lid opens again The hazard warning sys tem flashes and depending on the vehicle equipment a signal sounds Switching on the radio ready state Pressing the Start Stop button switches on the radio ready state refer to page 58 Do not depress the brake or the clutch other wise the engine will start Starting the engine The engine can be started or the ignition can be switched on when a remote control is inside the vehicle It is not necessary to insert a re 40 mote control into the
216. inst swapping wheels between the front and rear axles This can impair the handling characteristics Rotating the tires is not permissible when us ing different types of tires Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Always protect tires against all contact with oil grease and fuels Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres sure indicated on the side wall of the tire Snow chains Only certain fine link snow chains have been tested by BMW classified as safe for use and recommended Consult your service center for more information Snow chains must be mounted in pairs and on the rear wheels only Observe the manufactur er s instructions when mounting snow chains Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph 50 km h when using snow chains Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snow chains are mounted otherwise the instrument might issue an incorrect reading 235 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Mobility Wheels and tires When driving with snow chains it can be bene ficial to temporarily activate DTC refer to page 103 236 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Engine compartment Mobility Engine compartment Vehicle equipment special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and This chapter describes all series equipment as systems well as country specific and special
217. ion Contacts appointments tasks notes text messages and e mails from the mobile phone can be displayed on the Control Display if the mobile phone provides compatible support of these functions and the necessary Bluetooth standards Information about which mobile phones sup port Office functions can be found at www bmwusa com bluetooth A limited num ber of compatible mobile phones is available for Office Contents are only displayed in full length when the vehicle is stationary The mobile phone has read access only Do not use Office while driving To avoid becoming distracted and pos ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle s occupants and to other road users never at tempt to use the controls or enter information unless traffic and road conditions allow this Requirements gt A suitable mobile phone is paired with the vehicle and connected In some mobile phones data access must be confirmed on the mobile phone gt The time time zone and date refer to page 78 are correctly set on the Control Display and on the mobile phone for in stance to correctly display appointments gt Office is activated refer to page 195 Updating Data are updated every time the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle Appointment en tries tasks notes and reminders can be up dated separately 1 Office 2 Current office Calendar Tasks Notes or Reminders 3 Open Options 4 Update da
218. ion was entered in the navigation system refer to page 142 Displays on the Trip computer _ E Trip computer i 09 30 01 20 hr 140 km Distance 10 5 1 100 km Cons 095 5 km h Depart Duration Speed 76 gt Departure time gt Trip duration gt Trip distance Both displays show gt Average speed gt Average fuel consumption Resetting the fuel consumption and speed You can reset the values for average speed and average consumption 1 Select the respective menu item and press the controller 2 Press the controller again to confirm your selection Resetting the trip computer Resetting all values 1 Vehicle Info 2 Trip computer 3 Reset Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Displays Controls Settings and information Operating concept 1 Button for gt Calling up computer information 75 gt Selecting the display 3 With the lights switched on dimming the gt Setting values Instrument lighting 90 2 Button for 4 Calling up Check Control 84 gt Confirming selected display or set val S Checking the engine oil level 238 ues 6 Setting the time 78 7 Setting thedate 79 8 Viewing service requirement display 80 Exiting displays The external temperature reading and the time reappear when you press button 2 or if you make no entries within approx 15 seconds If required complete the current setting first 77 Online Edition for Part no 01 40
219. ion for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Communication Office Show contact pictures Pictures stored with the contacts are stored in the vehicle when the mobile phone is con nected to the vehicle The number of transmit ted pictures depends on the mobile phone The mobile phone must support this function Office Contacts Open Options Configure Bluetooth 5 Show images npr Display of all contact pictures is activated or deactivated Deleting contacts Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are deleted The contacts on the mobile phone cannot be deleted Office Contacts Highlight the contact Open Options Delete contact or Delete all contacts eo n So If necessary Yes Messages General information Whether or not text messages and e mails from the mobile phone are displayed depends on whether transmission from the mobile phone to the vehicle is supported Text mes sages and e mails may not be supported by the service provider or the function may need to be enabled separately After the mobile phone is first paired transmission may take several minutes Messages are only displayed in full length when the vehicle is stationary Messages from the additional telephone are not transmitted 208 Displaying messages 1 Office 2 Messages A symbol identifies the type of message Symbol Message type ez Text messages bd MyInfo pa Message from the Concie
220. ion is folded down and engaged on both sides refer to page 45 Unlocking E Press the button The vehicle is unlocked You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use 1 Settings 2 Door locks 3 Unlock button sc Door locks Unlock button All doors O Last seat position auto a O Lock if no door is opened UA gt oO Lock after start to drive O Flash when lock unlock 4 Select amenu item gt All doors E The entire vehicle is unlocked gt Driver s door only Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Opening and closing Controls E Only the driver s door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked Pressing again unlocks the entire vehicle 5 Press the controller Convenient opening window and hardtop When you are close to the vehicle the remote control for Comfort Access can be used to open the retractable hardtop A Press and hold the button on the remote control The windows and the retractable hardtop are opened if the doors are closed 5 Hold the button down When you are close to the vehicle the windows move up after the hardtop is opened Monitor the opening process Monitor the opening process to ensure that no one becomes trapped otherwise inju ries may result Releasing the button interrupts the opening process Locking Lock Press the button on the remote con trol Locking from the outside
221. ires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart signifi cantly from the norm due to variations in driv ing habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ma terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Wheels and tires Mobility car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law
222. isplayed Indicator warning lamps SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster amp The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up s Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti vated SPORT Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension for greater driving agility with maximum driving stabilization Activating SPORT Press the button repeatedly until SPORT is selected in the instrument cluster COMFORT For a balanced tuning with maximum driving stabilization 103 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Driving stability control systems Activating COMFORT Servotronic Press the button repeatedly until COMFORT is selected in the instru The concept ment cluster The Servotronic varies the steering force re quired to turn the wheels depending on the speed at which you are driving Power steering provides strong support at low speeds which means that little effort is needed to turn the wheels Power steering support lessens as your speed increases Displays in the instrument cluster The system works automatically Se TRACTION A A Malfunction 032050 123 8 _ Malfunctions are displayed via Check Control refer to page 84 The selected program is displayed in the in strument cluster Drive off assistant This system supports driving away on gradi ents The parking brake is not required 1 Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake 2 Release the foot brake and drive aw
223. ition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Navigation Navigation system Navigation system Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations General information The navigation system can determine the pre cise position of the vehicle with the aid of sat ellites and vehicle sensors and can reliably guide you to every entered destination Entries in stationary vehicle Enter data only when the vehicle is sta tionary and always give priority to the applica ble traffic regulations in the event of any con tradiction between traffic and road conditions and the instructions issued by the navigation system Failure to take to this precaution can place you in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants and other road users in danger lt Opening the navigation system iid Press the button on the controller 1 2 Navigation The navigation system can also be called up directly using the button on the con troller NAV 140 Navigation data Information on navigation data 1 Navigation 2 Open Options 3
224. itor TPM system reset 97 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM warning lamp 98 Tire Quality Grading 232 284 Tires changing 234 Tires flat tire 249 Tire size 231 Tires run flat tires 234 Tires Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 96 Tire tread 233 Toll roads route 151 Tone 162 Tool kit refer to Onboard ve hicle tool kit 245 Tools refer to Onboard vehi cle tool kit 245 Towing 253 Town city navigation 143 Tow starting 253 TPM Tire Pressure Moni tor 96 Traction control 102 TRACTION program Dy namic Driving Control 103 Traffic bulletins naviga tion 155 Transmission 7 gear auto matic transmission with dual clutch 68 Transmission 8 gear auto matic transmission 66 Transmission lock unlocking manually 71 Transmission lock unlocking manually with 7 gear auto matic transmission 71 Transmission manual trans mission 65 Transmission positions 7 gear automatic transmis sion 68 Transmission positions 8 gear automatic transmis sion 66 Transmission unlocking transmission lock manually for 7 gear automatic trans mission 71 Transporting children safely 55 Tread depth tires 233 Tread tires 233 Treble tone 162 Trip distance counter refer to Trip odometer 73 Triple turn signal activa tion 62 Trip odometer 73 Trips planning 149 Trunk lid 38 Trunk lid Comfort Access 40 Trunk lid emergency unlock ing 39 Trunk lid opening from the inside 38 Trunk lid opening from the
225. ity Postal Code or the dis played town city 2 1 Select the symbol 3 Select the numbers 4 Change to the list of postal codes and towns cities 5 Highlight the entry 6 Selecting an entry Entering a street and intersection 1 Select Street or the displayed street 2 Enter a street and intersection in the same way as you would enter a town city If there are several streets with the same name 1 Change to the list of street names 2 Highlight the street 3 Select the street Alternative enter the street address and house number 1 Select Street or the displayed street 2 Enter the street as you would the town city House number Select the numbers Change to the list of house numbers of ot a Select a house number or range of house numbers Street does not exist in the destination city town The desired street does not exist in the speci fied city town because it belongs to another part of the city town 1 Navigation Enter address Select Street or the displayed street Change to the list of street names an a ie Select In with the state province cur rently displayed All streets of the selected state province are offered The associated town city is displayed after the street name BEVERLY HILLS CA Ce In In UNITED STATES MUSAUSSTRASSE MUSENBERGSTRASSE MUSEUMSINSEL MUSPELHEIMSTRASSE MUSPILLISTRASSE 143 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 9
226. ject behind the vehicle and if equip ped accordingly in front of the vehicle by gt Signal tones gt A visual display Measurement Measurements are made by ultrasound sen sors in the bumpers The range is approx 6 ft 2 m An acoustic warning is first given gt By the front sensors and two rear corner sensors at approx 24 in 60 cm gt By the rear middle sensors at approx 5 ft 1 50 m System limits Check the traffic situation as well PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the driver s personal judgment of the traffic situa tion Check the traffic situation around the ve hicle with your own eyes Otherwise an acci dent could result from road users or objects located outside of the PDC detection range Loud noises from outside and inside the vehi cle may prevent you from hearing the PDC s signal tone lt Avoid driving quickly with PDC Avoid approaching an object quickly Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet active For technical reasons the system may other wise be too late in issuing a warning lt Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects can reach the physi cal limits of ultrasonic measurement for in stance gt With tow bars and trailer hitches gt With thin or wedge shaped objects gt With low objects gt With objects with corners and sharp edges Low objects already displayed e g curbs can move into the blind area of the sensors before o
227. l into the lighter socket or power socket could cause a short circuit lt Connecting electrical devices Note Do not connect the charger to the socket Do not connect the battery charger to the socket installed in the vehicle at the factory as this could damage the vehicle Sockets In your BMW when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on you can use electri cal devices such as a hand lamp car vacuum cleaner etc as long as one of the following sockets is available The total load of all sock ets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 V Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size Cigarette lighter socket Access to socket remove the lighter from the socket Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Interior equipment Controls Under the center armrest Before opening the hardtop pull the cargo External audio device refer to page 125 area partition 1 down until it engages in both guides 2 In the passenger footwell Observe before opening and closing the A socket is located on the left below the glove hardtop compartment gt Before moving the hardtop ensure that there are no objects on or next to the cargo area partition otherwise parts of the hard Cargo area top may be damaged Depending on your vehicle s equipment the gt Do not exceed the maximum loading following storage spaces can be found in the height refer to the sticker in the
228. lable for certain trips Deleting a stored trip 1 Navigation Stored trips Highlight the desired trip Open Options ae fe Delete all trios or Delete trip Opening the last trip 1 Navigation 2 Stored trips 3 Last trip 4 Start guidance 150 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Destination guidance Navigation Destination guidance Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Starting destination guidance 1 Navigation 2 Make a destination entry refer to page 142 3 Accept destination 4 Start guidance The route is shown on the Control Display The distance to the destination intermediate destination and the estimated time of arrival are displayed in the map view Terminating destination guidance Navigation Map Guidance Stop guidance SSS Continuing destination guidance If the destination was not reached during the last trip destination guidance can be resumed Resume guidance Route criteria General information gt The route calcul
229. ldren safely 57 Driving 73 Displays 87 Lamps 92 Safety 101 Driving stability control systems 105 Driving comfort 109 Climate 116 Interior equipment 124 Storage compartments Driving tips 130 Things to remember when driving Navigation 140 Navigation system 142 Destination entry 151 Destination guidance 159 What to do if Entertainment 162 Tone 164 Radio 172 CD multimedia Communication 194 205 214 217 Telephone Office Contacts ConnectedDrive Mobility 224 226 228 237 243 245 251 257 Refueling Fuel recommendation Wheels and tires Engine compartment Maintenance Replacing components Breakdown assistance Care Reference 264 266 274 Technical data Short commands of the voice activation system Everything from A to Z Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 dt Notes Notes Using this Owner s Manual The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic is by using the index An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter Additional sources of information Should you have any questions your service center will be glad to advise you at any time Information on BMW e g on technology is available on the Internet www bmwusa com BMW Driver s Guide App The Owner s Manual is available in many coun tries as an app Additional information on the Internet www bmw com bmw_drivers_guide Symbols FN Indicates precauti
230. le services Display of all services available in the vehicle 1 BMW Assist or ConnectedDrive 2 Service Status 220 3 Available services Service Status Update BMW Assist Available services Updating BMW Assist Manual update of TeleService 1 BMW Assist or ConnectedDrive 2 Service Status 3 Update BMW Assist Data transfer During the updating of BMW services display the status of the data transfer 1 BMW Assist or ConnectedDrive 2 Open Options 3 Data transfer Apps At a glance Certain software applications of a suitable mo bile phone can be integrated in the vehicle These software applications are displayed on the Control Display They are operated via iDrive Requirements gt The mobile phone is suitable gt The mobile phone operating system sup ports the software applications of Apps gt Software applications are installed on the mobile phone and ready to use Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 ConnectedDrive Communication gt Corresponding mobile wireless contract Any additionally incurred costs are not a part of Apps gt Use only BMW approved software applica tions otherwise it may result in malfunc tions Information about suitable mobile phones available software applications and their instal lation can be found at www bmw com connec tivity or at the service center Create the entries Make entries o
231. left rear of the vehicle a Signal gt Keep the sensors clean and free of ice tone sounds from the left rear speaker A message appears on the Control Display Have the system checked gt When using high pressure washers do not The shorter the distance to the object be spray the sensors for long periods and comes the shorter the intervals maintain a distance of at least 12 in 30 cm If the distance to a detected object is less than approx 10 in 25 cm a continuous tone Is sounded If objects are located both in front of and be hind the vehicle an alternating continuous sig nal is sounded The intermittent tone is interrupted after ap prox 3 seconds gt If the vehicle stops in front of an object that is detected by only one of the corner sen sors gt If moving parallel to a wall The signal tone is switched off gt When the vehicle moves away from an ob ject by more than approx 4 in 10 cm gt When transmission position P is engaged Volume You can set the volume of the PDC signal refer to page 163 The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use 108 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Climate Controls Climate Vehicle equipment special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and This chapter describes all series equipment as systems well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series T
232. les continue to embody the highest quality and safety stan dards In rare cases therefore the features de scribed in this Owner s Manual may differ from those in your vehicle Updates made after the editorial deadline Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner s Manuals are located in the ap pendix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Notes ss For your own safety Warranty Your vehicle is technically configured for the operating conditions and registration require ments applying in the country of first delivery homologation If your vehicle is to be oper ated in a different country it might be neces sary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differ Ing operating conditions and permit requirements If your vehicle does not comply with the homologation requirements in a cer tain country you cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there Further information can be obtained from your Service Center Maintenance and repairs Advanced technology e g the use of modern materials and high performance electronics requires suitable maintenance and repair methods Therefore have this work performed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works accord ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri ately trained personnel If this work is not carried out properly there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards
233. location followed by an ellipsis 1 Select an entry gt Yes lt or Entry lt e g En try 2 2 Select the desired town city Entering a street or intersection separately Enter a street and intersection in the same way as you would enter a town city Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Destination entry Navigation Entering a house number separately Depending on the data in the navigation sys tem house numbers up to number 2 000 can be entered 1 House number 2 Say the house number Say each digit separately 3 Continue making the entry as prompted by the system Starting destination guidance gt Start guidance Planning a trip with intermediate destinations New trip A trip can be planned with several intermediate destinations Navigation Map Move the controller to the left if necessary amp Guidance Enter new destination oS Se YS Select the type of destination entry amp New destination Enter address using Enter address Address book Ce 9 Last destinations F Points of Interest Interactive map 7 Enter the intermediate destination 8 Start guidance Entering intermediate destinations A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can be entered for a trip Enter new destination Select the type of destination entry Enter the intermediate destination S w S Add as another destination The intermediate destination is enter
234. locked 52 At a glance 1 Adjusting 2 Fold in and out 3 Left right Automatic Curb Monitor Selecting a mirror To change over to the other mirror Slide over the mirror changeover switch 3 Adjusting electrically The setting corresponds to the direc tion in which the button is pressed Saving positions Seat and mirror memory refer to page 51 Adjusting manually If an electrical malfunction occurs for example press the edges of the mirror glass Automatic Curb Monitor When the reverse gear is engaged the mirror glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas senger side This improves your view of the curb and other low lying obstacles when park ing for example Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Adjusting Controls Activating Interior rearview mirror 1 Slide the mirror changeover switch to the EEn driver s side mirror position arrow 1 Reducing the blinding effect u 2 Shift into reverse or engage transmission Blinding effect from behind when driving at position R night turn the knob Deactivating Interior rearview and exterior mirrors Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas automan Giniming cature senger side mirror position arrow 2 Fold in and out Press button 2 Possible up to approx 15 mph 20 km h For example this is advantageous gt In car washes gt In narrow streets The automatic dimming feature of the interior away manually
235. long trip Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear Drive away without delay Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary Start driving right away but at moderate engine speeds This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature Look well ahead when driving Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi cle driving ahead of you Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces fuel consumption Avoid high engine speeds Use 1st gear to get the vehicle in motion Be ginning with 2nd gear accelerate rapidly When accelerating shift up before reaching high engine speeds When you reach the desired speed shift into the highest applicable gear and drive with the engine speed as low as possible and at a con stant speed As arule driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear Use coasting conditions When approaching a red light take your foot off the accelerator and coast to a halt in the highest applicable gear On a downhill slope take your foot off the ac celerator and coast in a suitable gear The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting Switch off the engine during longer stops Switch off the engine during longer stops e g at traffic lights railroad crossings or in traffic congestion Automatic Engine
236. loor panel refer to page 245 Tow fitting information on use gt Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in gt Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only gt Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting e g do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting Otherwise damage to the tow fitting and the vehicle can occur lt Screw thread Front Release the cover panel in the bumper Press on the recess at the bottom left in the cover panel 256 Rear Release the cover panel in the bumper Press on the recess at the bottom center in the cover panel Tow starting Sport automatic transmission Do not tow start the vehicle Due to the Sport automatic transmission the engine cannot be started by tow starting Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem edied Manual transmission If possible do not tow start the vehicle but start the engine by jump starting refer to page 252 it If the vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter only tow start while the en gine is cold 1 Switch on the hazard warning system 2 Switch on the ignition refer to page 57 3 Shift into 3rd gear 4 Have the vehicle tow started with the clutch pressed and slowly release the clutch After the engine starts immediately depress the clutch completely again 5 Stop at a suitable location remove the tow bar or rope and switch off the hazard warning syste
237. m 6 Have the vehicle checked Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Care Mobility Care Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Car washes Notes Steam jets or high pressure washers When using steam jets or high pressure washers hold them a sufficient distance away and use a maximum temperature of 140 F 60 C Holding them too close or using excessively high pressures or temperatures can cause damage or preliminary damage that may then lead to long term damage Follow the operating instructions for the high pressure washer lt Cleaning sensors cameras with high pressure washers When using high pressure washers do not spray the seals of the retractable hardtop and the exterior sensors and cameras for Park Dis tance Control for instance for extended peri ods of time and only from a distance of at least 12 in 30 cm Regularly remove foreign bodies such as leaves from the area below the windshield when the hood is open Wash your vehicle frequently particularly in winter I
238. m Deleting a track and directory A track cannot be deleted while it is being played A directory cannot be deleted while a track from that directory is being played CD Multimedia Music collection Highlight the directory or track Open Options a a SS Delete folder or Delete track Free memory capacity Display the free memory capacity in the music collection CD Multimedia Music collection Open Options ee ee prs Free memory Music collection Backing up the music collection The entire music collection can be stored ona USB device Make sure there is enough free memory capacity on the USB device Depending on the number of tracks backing up the music collection may take several 181 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Entertainment _ CD multimedia hours Therefore it is best to perform the Deleting the music collection backup during a long trip 1 CD Multimedia 1 Starting the engine 2 Music collection 2 Connect the USB device to the USB inter 3 Open Options face in the glove compartment refer to 4 Delete music collection page 124 3 CD Multimedia 4 Music collection External devices 5 Open Options 5 j i At a glance Music data import export Free memory K AUX IN port Delete music collection eDiultmedia p USB audio interface O Random Music interface for smartphones Music data import export ie i Bluetooth audio
239. mation will be broadcast shortly fy Information is currently being broadcast Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic Jump Automatic update About twice a year Sirius performs an update of the channel names and positions The up date takes place automatically and may take several minutes Notes gt Reception may not be available in some situations such as under certain environ mental or topographic conditions The sat ellite radio has no influence on this gt The signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages next to tall build ings or near trees mountains or other powerful sources of radio interference Stored stations General information It is possible to store up to 40 stations Calling up a station 1 Radio 2 Presets 3 Select the desired station Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Radio Entertainment Storing a station The station currently selected is stored 1 Radio 2 Presets 3 Store station F4 Store station 1 Hit Radio 2 Classic Radio 3 Chart Radio 4 News Radio 4 Select the desired memory location The list of stored stations is stored for the re mote control currently in use The stations can also be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons refer to page 24 Deleting a station 1 Radio 2 Presets 3 Select the desired station 4 Open Options 5 Delete entry 171 Online Edition for P
240. may be necessary in some mobile phones e g authorization or a secure connection refer to the mobile phone operating instructions Connecting a particular mobile phone 1 Telephone 2 Bluetooth phone 3 Select the mobile phone that is to be con nected The functions assigned to the mobile phone before unpairing are assigned to the mobile Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Telephone Communication phone when it is reconnected These functions are deactivated in a mobile phone that is al ready connected Configuring the mobile phone Additional functions can be activated or deacti vated for paired and connected mobile phones 1 Telephone 2 Bluetooth phone 3 Highlight the mobile phone to be config ured Open Options 5 Configure phone 6 Atleast one function must be selected gt Telephone gt Additional telephone gt Audio 7 OK If a function has already been assigned to an other connected mobile phone the function is deactivated in that mobile phone and the mo bile phone is unpaired when the function is as signed to a new mobile phone Swapping the telephone and additional telephone The function of the telephone and additional telephone can be swapped automatically 1 Telephone 2 Bluetooth phone 3 Swap phone addit phone Unpairing the mobile phone 1 Telephone 2 Bluetooth phone 3 Highlight the mobile phone that is to
241. mmended fuel grades Recommended fuel grade BMW recommends AKI 91 Minimum fuel grade BMW recommends AKI 89 Minimum fuel grade Do not fill up with fuel below the speci fied minimum quality otherwise the engine may not run properly lt If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI rat ing the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures This has no effect on the engine life Minimum fuel grade The use of poor quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage Addi tionally problems relating to drivability start ing and stalling especially under certain envi ronmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude may occur If drivability problems are encountered we rec ommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade AKI num ber for a few tank fills To avoid harmful en gine deposits it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retail ers Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unscheduled main tenance lt Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Fuel recommendation Mobility bp BMW recommends BP fuels 227 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Mobility Wheels and tires Wheels and tires Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered
242. mp 4 Sender Recipient If the e mail addresses are stored in the con tacts the contact is displayed Select the con tact to display details If the e mail addresses are not stored in the contacts only the e mail address is displayed Using contact data Contact data from appointments tasks text messages e mails and notes can be saved or selected refer to page 212 Deactivating the full display When an e mail is opened in the vehicle the e mail is fully transmitted to the vehicle This may result in charges 1 Office 2 Messages 210 3 Open Options 4 Fully download e mails Only a part of the e mail from the mobile phone is loaded into the vehicle Reading the e mail out loud Read the e mail out loud refer to page 212 Calendar Display the calendar Appointments during the last 20 days and the next 50 days can be displayed 1 Office 2 Calendar The appointments on the current day are displayed Selecting the calendar day 1 Select the date amp Calendar Thursday 09 00 10 30 03 07 Team Meeting Office 2 Select the desired day or date gt Next day gt Date gt Previous day gt Today Display the appointment 1 Select the desired appointment 2 Scroll through the appointment if neces Sary gt Turn the controller Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Office Communication gt 0 LB Select the symbol U
243. mponents in which the gears are changed without loss of torque The transmission is operated using the selec tor lever and two shift paddles on the steering wheel Functions gt Choice of manual or automatic operation manual mode or Drive mode gt Automatic downshifting and protection against selecting the wrong gear even in manual mode gt Acceleration assistant Launch Control re fer to page 71 gt Automatic throttle blip System limits This transmission is equipped with an over heating protection system that protects the clutches against extremely high loads _ The indicator lamp lights up yellow if i 0 the transmission becomes too warm Avoid high engine loads and driving off frequently If the transmission overheats the indicator lamp lights up red and power flow to the en gine is interrupted You can only continue driv ing after the transmission has cooled down Avoid driving off frequently with high accelera tion and do not hold the vehicle on inclines by depressing the accelerator lightly otherwise the transmission may overheat Transmission positions PRNDM S Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Displays in the instrument cluster The gear position and the engaged gear such as M4 are displayed Engaging transmission positions N D R gt Transmission position P can only be disen gaged if the engine Is running gt Before moving the lever aw
244. n addition the text of that sec tion should be disregarded and the follow ing text should be read in lieu thereof The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type other wise for example despite having the same official size ratings variations can lead to body contact and with it the risk of severe accidents The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate non recommended wheels and tires to determine if they are suitable for use on your vehicle At page 238 under the heading Hood the sentence beginning If you are unfamiliar should be disregarded At page 243 and page 244 under the head ing Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod els the second paragraph should be disre garded and the following text read in lieu thereof 14 to The manufacturer of your vehicle recom mendes that you have maintenance and repair performed by your BMW dealer s ser vice center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you maintain records of all maintenance and repair work performed on your vehicle At page 246 where it reads Do not per form wo
245. nauthorized or unlawful activities by you in connection herewith B Total Traffic Network traffic data is infor mational only User assumes all risk of use Total Traffic Network BMW NA and their suppliers make no representations about content traffic and road conditions route usability or speed C The licensed material is provided to li censee as is and where is Total Traf fic Network including but not limited to any and all third party providers of any of the licensed material expressly disclaims to the fullest extent permitted by law all warranties or representations with respect to the licensed material including without limitation that the licensed material will be error free will operate without interruption or that the traffic data will be accurate ex press implied or statutory including with out limitation the implied warranties of merchantability non infringement fitness for a particular purpose or those arising from a course of dealing or usage of trade D Neither Total Traffic Network Inrix Inc or BMW NA will be liable to you for any in direct special consequential exemplary or incidental damages including without limitation lost revenues anticipated reve nues or profits relating to the same arising from any claim relating directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data and even if Total Traffic Network Inrix Inc or BMW NA are aware of the possibility of such damages
246. ncy unlocking trunk lid from the inside 39 Energy saving Automatic Start Stop function 59 Engine compartment 237 Engine coolant refer to Cool ant 241 Engine oil adding 240 Engine oil additives 240 Engine oil checking the level 238 Engine oil temperature 74 Engine oil types alterna tive 240 Engine oil types ap proved 240 Engine overheating refer to Coolant temperature 74 Engine start Help 252 Engine starting 58 211 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Reference Everything from A to Z Engine starting Comfort Ac cess 39 Engine starting Start Stop button 57 Engine stopping Start Stop button 57 Engine switching off 59 Engine temperature 74 Entry comparison 25 Entry lamps refer to Interior lamps 91 Equalizer 162 Equipment interior 116 Error messages refer to Check Control 84 ESP Electronic Stability Pro gram refer to DSC 101 Exchanging wheels tires 234 Exhaust system 131 Exterior mirrors 52 Exterior mirrors automatic dimming 53 Exterior mirrors automatic heating 53 Exterior mirrors folding in and out 53 Exterior mirrors setting 52 External audio device 125 External devices 182 External start 252 External temperature dis play 73 External temperature display changing the unit of meas ure 8 External temperature display on computer 78 External temperature warn ing 73 Eyes for securing cargo 134 F Fader 162 Failure mess
247. nds on how the vehicle is used during the trip the actual distance may be smaller or greater depending on the driving speed road conditions external temperature cargo load etc 96 Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h A loss of tire inflation pressure results ina change in the handling characteristics e g re duced lane stability during braking a longer braking distance and altered self steering properties Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of the tire Reduce speed and stop otherwise pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident Do not continue driving and contact your service center Tire Pressure Monitor TPM The concept The system monitors the tire pressure in the four mounted tires The system issues a warn ing if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire pressure Notes Tire damage caused by external influen ces Sudden tire damage caused by external influ ences cannot be indicated in advance lt To operate the system also note the additional information and instructions contained under Tire inflation pressure refer to page 228 Functional requirement The system must have been reset while the in flation pressure was correct otherwise reliable signaling of pressure loss is not ensured Reset t
248. ner 110 Interior temperature setting refer to Automatic climate control 112 Intermediate destina tions 149 Intermittent wipe 63 Internet page 6 Intersection entering for navi gation 143 Interval display service re quirements 80 J Jacking points 249 Joystick refer to iDrive 20 K Keyless Go refer to Comfort Access 39 Keyless opening and closing refer to Comfort Access 39 Key Memory refer to Per sonal Profile 32 279 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Reference Everything from A to Z Key refer to Integrated key remote control 32 Kickdown 7 gear automatic transmission 70 Kickdown 8 gear automatic transmission 66 Knee airbag 92 L Lamps and bulbs bulb re placement 245 Lamps replacing refer to Lamps and bulbs 245 Language on Control Dis play 80 Lap and shoulder belt refer to Safety belts 50 Lashing eyes securing cargo 134 Launch Control acceleration assistant 71 Leather care 258 LED light emitting di odes 246 Length refer to Dimen sions 264 Letters and numbers enter ing 25 License plate light bulb re placement 248 Light 87 Light alloy wheels care 259 Light control 88 Light emitting diodes LED 246 Lighter 120 Lighter connecting electrical devices 120 Lighting instruments 90 Lighting lamps and bulbs 245 Light switch 87 Limit refer to Speed limit 85 Load 133 Loading 132 280 Lockable lug bolts refer to Lu
249. ng angle or the steering wheel is being turned gt After driving in reverse Fogging of the windows when the auto matic climate control is switched on Vehicle battery charge is very low Hood is unlocked Stop and go traffic OA The indicator lamp is lit Parking the vehicle during an automatic engine stop The vehicle can be parked safely during an au tomatic engine stop such as when you wish to leave the vehicle 1 Press the Start Stop button The ignition is switched off The Auto Start Stop function is deactivated 2 Set the parking brake Start the engine as usual using the Start Stop button Automatic engine start To drive away the engine starts automatically as soon as the clutch pedal is depressed After the engine starts accelerate as usual Safety mode The engine does not start by itself after it is switched off automatically if any of the follow ing conditions are fulfilled gt The driver s safety belt is unfastened or the driver s door is open gt Hood was unlocked 60 The indicator lamp lights up A mes sage appears on the Control Display The engine can only be started via the Start Stop button Note Even if you do not wish to drive away the stop ped engine still starts automatically in the fol lowing situations gt The interior has heated up strongly with the cooling function switched on The steering wheel is turned gt The vehicle begins to roll
250. ng safety defects 9 Reservoir for washer fluid 65 Restraining systems refer to Safety belts 50 Restraint system for chil dren 55 Retaining straps securing cargo 134 Retractable hardtop conven ient opening and closing 35 Retractable hardtop opening and closing 44 Retractable hardtop remote control 35 Retreaded tires 235 Reverse gear gear auto matic transmission 69 Reverse gear 8 gear auto matic transmission 66 Reverse gear manual trans mission 65 Rim cleaner care 259 Road avoiding 151 Road detour 151 Roadside Assistance 217 Roadside parking lights 89 Roadworthiness test 80 Roof refer to Retractable hardtop 44 Route 152 Route criteria route 151 Route displaying 152 Route section bypass ing 152 RSC Runflat System Compo nent refer to Run flat tires 234 Rubber components care 259 Run flat tires 234 Run flat tires tire inflation pressure 228 Running lights refer to Park ing lamps low beams 87 S Safe braking 131 Safety 7 Safety belt height adjust ment 51 Safety belts care 259 Safety belts damage 51 Safety belts indicator warn ing lamp 51 Safety belts reminder 51 Safety systems airbags 92 Safety systems safety belts 50 Safety tires 234 Satellite radio 166 Saving fuel 134 Scale changing during navi gation 154 Screen refer to Control Dis play 20 Search refer to BMW On line 218 Seat adjustment electric 49 Seat adjustment mechani
251. nger compartment Only trans Mount the cupholder onto the center console port heavy luggage in the trunk if it has so that it snaps into place been appropriately secured lt Storing in the glove compartment Insert the cupholder into the holder in the Cupholders glove compartment Shatter proof containers and no hot drinks Use light and shatter proof containers and do not transport hot drinks Otherwise there is the increased danger of injury in an accident lt 126 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Storage compartments Controls 127 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Driving tips This section provides you with information useful in dealing with specific driving and operating conditions Driving tips eka Things to remember when driving Things to remember when driving Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Breaking in period General information Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to each other The following instructions will help achieve a long veh
252. nize with the aid of a second person Synchronization 1 Park the vehicle within range of the re mote controlled system 2 Program the corresponding button on the interior rearview mirror as described 3 Identify and press the synchronization but ton on the system being set up You have approx 30 seconds for the next step 4 Press and hold the button on the interior rearview mirror for approx 3 seconds and then release it Repeat this step up to three times if necessary to complete the syn chronization procedure When synchroni zation is completed the programmed func tion is executed Reprogramming individual buttons 1 Switch on the ignition 2 Hold the hand held transmitter at a dis tance of approx 1 to 3 in 2 5 to 8 cm from the memory buttons The required distance depends on the par ticular hand held transmitter 3 Press the memory button of the universal garage door opener 4 Ifthe LED flashes slowly after approx 20 seconds press the transmit button on the hand held transmitter 5 Release both buttons when the LED flashes rapidly 117 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Interior equipment If the LED does not flash rapidly after ap prox 60 seconds change the distance and repeat the step Canada if the LED does not flash rapidly after approx 60 seconds change the dis tance and repeat the step If programming was aborted by the hand held transmitt
253. nly when traffic and road conditions allow Otherwise the vehicle occu pants and other road users may be put in dan ger because of the distraction from driving For reasons of safety some software applica tions are usable only while the vehicle is sta tionary Operating Apps 1 Connect the mobile phone via the snap in adapter or via the USB audio interface 2 ConnectedDrive 3 Select the desired software application Displaying status Information about the currently available soft ware applications can be displayed 1 ConnectedDrive 2 BMW apps Notes gt The ranges of Apps that can be displayed on the Control Display depend on the range of installed software applications on the mobile phone gt The data transmission of the software ap plications from the mobile phone to the ve hicle can last some time Some software applications depend on the speed of the available Internet connection of the mobile phone gt Some mobile phones cannot simultane ously use Apps and the Bluetooth hands free system If necessary restart the software applica tion on the mobile phone after a phone conversation Remote Services With Remote Services a connection can be established between a mobile phone and the vehicle This connection can be used for ex ample to lock and unlock the vehicle Depending on the vehicle additional functions may be available To be able to use the functions the My BMW Rem
254. ns 4 New contact EF Options O Split screen Close control display a Contacts New contact Delete all contacts Display first last name Office 5 The entry fields are still filled with the pre vious entries Delete input fields 6 Fill in the entry fields select the symbol next to the entry field 7 Enter the text and assign the contact type 8 Ifthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation system enter the address Only addresses contained in the navigation data in the ve hicle can be entered This ensures that destination guidance is possible for all ad dresses If necessary Accept address 9 Store contact in vehicle Contact types Various contact types can be assigned to phone numbers and addresses gt Home phone number ES Business phone number Mobile phone number Ay Other phone number fi Home address ifii Business address Specifying the home address A home address can be stored It appears at the top of the contact list Office Contacts Home Create a contact E a a Store contact in vehicle Selecting the sorting order of the names Names can be displayed in a different order Office Contacts Open Options pmu S Display last first name or Display first last name Depending on how the contacts were stored on the mobile phone the sorting order of the names may differ from the selected sorting or der 207 Online Edit
255. ntense soiling and road salt can damage the vehicle Washing in automatic car washes Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage Notes Note the following gt Make sure that the wheels and tires are not damaged by the transport mechanisms gt Fold in the exterior mirrors otherwise they may be damaged depending on the width of the vehicle gt Deactivate the rain sensor refer to page 64 to avoid unintentional wiper acti vation gt Unscrew the road antenna Guide rails in car washes Avoid car washes with guide rails higher than 4 in 10 cm otherwise the vehicle body could be damaged lt Before driving into a car wash The vehicle is able to roll if the following steps are taken Manual transmission 1 Shift to neutral 2 Release the parking brake refer to page 61 3 Switch the engine off 4 Leave the remote control in the ignition lock 257 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Mobility Care Sport automatic transmission 1 Insert the remote control into the ignition lock even with Comfort Access 2 Release the parking brake refer to page 61 Drive into the car wash Engage transmission position N Switch the engine off oe pr e Leave the remote control in the ignition lock so that the vehicle can roll When starting the engine 1 Depress the brake pedal 2 Press the Start Stop button
256. nual for transport ing a trailer to determine how this may re duce the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle Load h isi oie lt Max Load 1 lt Max Load The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo The greater the weight of the occupants the less cargo that can be transported Stowing cargo Cargo area 133 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Driving tips gt Heavy cargo stow as far forward and as low as possible ideally directly behind the cargo area separating wall gt Cover sharp edges and corners Loading with the hardtop open Before opening the hardtop fold down the cargo area partition and make sure the cargo area is loaded correctly otherwise parts of the hardtop could be damaged Fold down the cargo area partition refer to page 45 Rear storage shelf Loading the rear storage shelf When loading the rear storage shelf do not move both seats all the way forward while moving them to their uppermost position and leaning the backrests forward Otherwise the seats could hit and damage the seal on the windshield and the sun visor B JA Light and small objects can be stored on the rear storage shelf Securing cargo Cargo area Use retaining straps a luggage net or draw straps to secure small and lightweight items Rear storage shelf You can obtain cargo straps from your service cente
257. o frequency gt Malfunction Status information The status control display additionally shows the current tire inflation pressures It shows the actual values read they may vary depending on driving style or weather conditions Resetting the system Reset the system after adjusting the tire infla tion pressure and every time a tire or wheel is changed MENU Press the button The start menu opens Vehicle Info Vehicle status 1 1 Reset Start the engine but do not start driving Start the system reset with Reset Se Se Drive away The tires are shown in gray and Resetting TPM is displayed After a short trip at over 30 km h the set tire inflation pressures are adopted as target val ues The system reset is completed as you drive and can be interrupted at any time When driving resumes the reset is continued automatically On the Control Display the tires are shown in green and TPM active is dis played again If a flat tire is detected while the system is re setting and determining the inflation pres sures all tires on the Control Display are dis played in yellow The message Low tire is shown 97 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Safety Low tire pressure message The warning lights come on in yellow f f and red A message appears on the towne Control Display In addition a signal sounds gt There is a flat tire or a
258. oadside Assistance The Roadside Assistance number is dis played If the mobile phone is paired a connection is established to Roadside As sistance ConnectedDrive BMW Assist Concierge Messages w Roadside Assistance BMW Online Customer Relations Service Request Starting Roadside Assistance with TeleService In vehicles equipped with TeleService support is first offered by TeleService Diagnosis and then if necessary by TeleService Help 1 BMW Assist or ConnectedDrive 2 Roadside Assistance 3 Start service F Roadside Assistance Start service Service ready TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that are important for vehicle diagnosis These data are transmitted automatically 218 After the data are transmitted the voice con nection to Roadside Assistance is re estab lished BMW Online At a glance A business search can be opened via BMW Online License conditions This product contains NetFront Browser soft ware of ACCESS Co Ltd Copyright 2007 ACCESS Co Ltd All rights reserved NetFront is a trademark or registered trade mark of ACCESS CO LTD in Japan and other countries This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group Requirements gt Subscription to the optional Convenience Plan gt The date setting refer to page Control Display is current J on the gt The
259. omatically switches off the engine dur ing a stop e g in traffic congestion or at traffic lights The ignition remains switched on The engine starts again automatically when the clutch is pressed Automatic operation The automatic engine Start Stop function is operational after each engine start It is acti vated whenever you drive forward faster than 3 mph 5 km h Automatic engine stop The engine is switched off automatically dur ing a stop under the following conditions gt Neutral gear is engaged and the clutch pedal is not depressed gt The driver s safety belt is fastened or the driver s door is closed When the engine is switched off the air vol ume of the air conditioner or automatic climate control is reduced Indicator light in the instrument cluster sar The indicator lamp lights up when the A Auto Start Stop function is ready to start the engine automatically st The indicator lamp lights up if the re os quirements for an automatic engine stop are not fulfilled Note The engine is not switched off automatically in the following situations gt External temperature too low 59 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Driving gt High external temperature and operation of the automatic climate control gt The interior is not yet heated or cooled as much as desired gt The engine is not yet at operating temper ature gt Sharp steeri
260. on the remote control Press again within one second and hold until the retractable hardtop stops in an in termediate position The trunk lid opens slightly 2 Open the trunk lid press the cargo area partition upward and stow the cargo in the Cargo area 35 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Opening and closing 3 Press down the cargo area partition until it engages on both sides and close the trunk lid 4 BA Press the button on the remote control for an extended period to fold the retracta ble hardtop back in Confirmation signals from the vehicle 1 Settings 2 Door locks 3 Flash when lock unlock sc Door locks Unlock button All doors O Last seat position auto O Lock if no door is opened O Lock after start to drive O Flash when lock unlock 4 Press the controller Retrieving the seat and mirror settings The driver s seat and exterior mirror positions used last are stored for the remote control cur rently in use When the vehicle is being unlocked these po sitions are automatically retrieved if the setting is activated Keep the footwell behind the driver s seat clear When this Personal Profile function is used first make sure that the footwell behind the driver s seat is free of obstacles Failure to do so could result in damage to the objects if the seat were to move rearward lt The adjustment procedure is interrupted gt When a seat p
261. ons before pairing to be able to use them in the vehicle Information on suit able mobile phones refer to page 194 that support this function Telephone Bluetooth phone Open Options Configure Bluetooth Select the desired additional function Se a eS gt Additional telephone gt Office gt Bluetooth audio 6 OK An additional function cannot be assigned to a telephone while it is deactivated Additional telephone A mobile phone can be used as an additional telephone The additional telephone can be used to ac cept incoming calls refer to page 198 While a call is active on the additional telephone re 195 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Communication Telephone ceived calls are displayed on the Control Dis play Audio source A mobile phone can be used as an audio source Pairing and connecting a mobile phone Pairing the mobile phone To avoid becoming distracted and pos ing an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehicle s occupants and to other road users only pair the mobile phone while the vehicle is stationary lt 1 Telephone 2 Bluetooth phone 3 Add new phone The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis played 4 Toperform additional steps on the mobile phone refer to the mobile phone operating instructions for instance search for or connect the Bluetooth device or a new de vice The Bluetooth name of the vehicl
262. ons that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle Marks the end of a specific item of information Identifies display texts in vehicle used to select individual functions lt Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system amp Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment Symbols on vehicle components Ti Indicates that you should consult the relevant section of this Owner s Manual for information on a particular part or assembly Vehicle equipment This Owner s Manual describes all models all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered in the model series Therefore this Owner s Manual also de scribes and depicts equipment that may not be contained in your vehicle because of the se lected special equipment or country version for example This also applies to safety related functions and systems For options and equipment not described in this Owner s Manual please refer to the Sup plementary Owner s Manuals On right hand drive vehicles some controls are arranged differently than shown in the illus trations Status of this Owner s Manual at time of printing The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is con ceived to ensure that our vehic
263. or or connect the Blue tooth device or a new device The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the device display Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the device display You are prompted by the iDrive or device to enter the same Bluetooth passkey Enter the passkey and confirm Enter same passkey for vehicle and Bluetooth p phone Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 CD multimedia Entertainment 8 Select the desired functions with which the device is to be connected for instance Audio O OK 7 Bluetooth function Functions of the device EY Telephone LY Audio If pairing was successful the device is dis played as connected White symbol JJ the device is active as an audio source If pairing was unsuccessful What to do if re fer to page 188 Connecting a specific device A device that has already been paired can be connected as an active audio source Connecting is not possible when data is ex changed via a mobile phone connected via Bluetooth Requirements If necessary activate the audio connection of the desired device from the list of paired devi ces CD Multimedia Bluetooth audio If necessary Bluetooth audio p o a Select the desired device from the list of paired devices Open Options Configure phone Activate Audio OK O N o Connecting the device 1 CD Multimedia 2 Bluetooth audio
264. or route guid ance The destination data is not contained in the navigation data Select a destination that is as close as possible to the original gt Letters for destination input cannot be se lected The stored data do not contain the data of the destination Select a destination that is as Close as possible to the original gt Is the map displayed in shades of gray Traffic conditions gray map active The Control Display changes to a black and white display This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins gt Spoken instructions are no longer output during route guidance in front of intersec tions The area has not yet been fully recorded or you have left the recommended route and the system requires a few seconds to calculate a new route suggestion 159 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Entertainment This chapter helps assure your enjoyment when receiving radio stations and playing CDs DVDs and tracks from the music collection Entertainment _ Tone Tone Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here ad
265. ormation remains visible even when you change to another menu Switching the split screen on and off Press the button 2 Split screen The split screen view is activated Selecting the display Press the button 2 Split screen 3 Move the controller until the split screen is selected 4 Press the controller or select Split screen content 5 Select the desired menu item Split screen content EY Split screen Map facing north Map direction of travel Map view with perspective Position v Onboard info Trip computer Programmable memory buttons General information The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons and called up di rectly e g radio stations navigation destina Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 iDrive Ataglance a glance tions phone numbers and entry points into the menu The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use Saving a function 1 Highlight the function via the iDrive 2 Press the desired button for more than two seconds Running a function Press the button TE The function will run immediately This means for example that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected Displaying the button assignment Use a finger to touch the buttons Do not wear gloves or use objects The key assignment is displayed at the top edge of the screen CD Multimedia Telephone Nav
266. osition switch is pressed gt When a button of the seat and mirror mem ory is pressed briefly 1 Settings 36 2 Door locks 3 Last seat position auto sc Door locks Unlock button All doors O Last seat position auto O Lock if no door is opened O Lock after start to drive O Flash when lock unlock Malfunctions Local radio waves may interfere with the re mote control In this case unlock and lock the car at the door lock with the integrated key In vehicles without an alarm system or Comfort Access only the driver s door can be unlocked and locked using the integrated key in the door lock If the car can no longer be locked with a re mote control the battery in the remote control is discharged Use the remote control during an extended drive in order to recharge the bat tery refer to page 32 The remote control for Comfort Access con tains a battery that may need to be replaced refer to page 41 For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC Federal Communication Commission regulations Operation is gov erned by the following FCC ID LX8766S LX8766E LX8CAS Compliance statement Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Opening and closing Controls This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions gt This device may not cause harmful inter ference and
267. ote app must be downloaded Operation takes place via the app Alternatively the functions can also be used via the ConnectedDrive Hotline The operating instructions for the My BMW Remote app can be found on the Connected Drive portal or at www bmw com 221 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Mobility Refueling Refueling Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations General information Refuel promptly At the latest refuel at a range of 30 miles 50 km otherwise the engine function is not ensured and damage may occur lt Notes Switch off the engine before refueling Always switch off the engine before refu eling otherwise fuel cannot be added to the tank and a message will be displayed lt Observe when handling fuel gt Take all precautionary measures and observe all applicable regulations when handling fuel gt Donotcarry any spare fuel containers in your vehicle They can develop a leak and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the event of an accident 224 Fuel filler
268. ou do not ob 194 serve this precaution you can endanger the vehicle occupants and other road users lt Snap in adapter The snap in adapter is used to gt Hold the mobile phone gt Recharge the battery gt Connect the mobile phone to an outside antenna of the vehicle This provides for better network reception and consistent sound quality Approved mobile phones Details on which mobile phones and external devices with a Bluetooth interface are sup ported by the mobile phone preparation pack age can be obtained at www bmwusa com bluetooth Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number The vehicle identification number and software part number are needed to determine which mobile phones are supported by the mobile phone preparation package The software ver sion of the mobile phone may also be required 1 Telephone 2 Open Options 3 Bluetooth info 4 Display system information These approved mobile phones with a certain software version support the vehicle functions described below Malfunctions may occur with other mobile phones or software versions Do not operate a mobile phone that is con nected to the vehicle on the mobile phone key pad as this may lead to a malfunction Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Telephone Communication A software update refer to page 189 can be performed if necessary Notes At high temperature
269. outside 38 Turning circle refer to Dimen sions 264 Turn signal indicator warning lamp 16 Turn signals 62 Turn signals bulb replace ment front 247 Turn signals triple turn signal activation 62 U Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG 232 Unintentional alarms 42 Units average fuel consump tion 78 Units of measure changing on the Control Display 78 Units temperature 78 Universal remote control 116 Unlocking from the inside 38 Unlocking from the out side 34 Unlocking hood 238 Unlocking setting the unlock ing characteristics 34 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Everything from A to Z Reference Unlocking trunk lid 40 Unlocking without remote control refer to Comfort Ac cess 39 Updates made after the edito rial deadline 6 Update software 189 Upholstery care 259 USB audio interface 183 USB interface 124 V Vacuum cleaner connecting refer to Connecting electri cal devices 120 Vehicle Identification number refer to Engine compartment 237 Vehicle battery 249 Vehicle battery replace ment 249 Vehicle break in 130 Vehicle care 258 Vehicle care refer to Care 257 Vehicle cargo 264 Vehicle dimensions refer to Dimensions 264 Vehicle equipment 6 Vehicle identification num ber 194 Vehicle jack 249 Vehicle paint 258 Vehicle storage 260 Vehicle switching off 59 Vehicle wash 257 Vehicle weight 264 Ventilation 111 115 Ventilation dra
270. ow as possible if the airbag is trig gered gt There should be no people animals or ob jects between an airbag and a person gt Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area gt Keep the dashboard and window on the front passenger side clear i e do not cover with adhesive labels or coverings and do not attach holders such as for navi gation instruments and mobile phones gt Make sure that the front passenger is sit ting correctly i e keeps his or her feet and legs in the footwell otherwise leg injuries can occur if the front airbag is triggered Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Safety Controls gt Do not place slip covers seat cushions or other objects on the front passenger seat that are not approved specifically for seats with integrated side airbags gt Donothang pieces of clothing such as jackets over the backrests gt Make sure that passengers do not lean their heads against the side airbag other wise serious injuries could result if the air bag suddenly deployed gt Do not remove the airbag restraint system Do not remove the steering wheel gt Do not apply adhesive materials to the air bag cover panels cover them or modify them in any way gt Never modify either the individual compo nents or the wiring in the airbag system This also applies to the covers of the steer ing wheel the dashboard and the seats
271. ow opens automatically tection Press the switch again to stop the opening Even with the pinch protection system check movement that the window s closing path is clear other wise the closing action may not stop in certain situations e g if thin objects are present Jointly Do not use window accessories Do not install any accessories in the range of movement of the windows otherwise the pinch protection system will be impaired Closing without the pinch protection system For example if there is an external danger or if ice on the windows prevents a window from gt Press the switch to the resistance point closing normally proceed as follows All windows open while the switch is held 1 Pull the switch past the resistance point Closing can be performed in the same and hold it there Pinch protection is lim manner by pulling the switch ited and the window reopens slightly if the gt Press the switch beyond the resistance closing force exceeds a certain value point 2 Pull the switch past the resistance point All windows open automatically again within approx 4 seconds and hold it Press the switch again to stop the opening mete movement The window closes without pinch protec tion 43 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Opening and closing Retractable hardtop General information Adhere to the following instructions gt Itis advisable that you close the retractable h
272. p starting refer to page 252 towing refer to page 253 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Displays Controls Displays Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Odometer external temperature display clock nd gt 575 mis 032050 123 8 1 Knob in the instrument cluster 2 External temperature display and clock 3 Odometer and trip odometer Knob in the instrument cluster gt To reset the trip odometer while the igni tion is switched on gt To display the time external temperature and odometer briefly while the ignition is switched off Units of measure To set the respective units of measure miles or km for the odometer and C or F for the ex ternal temperature refer to page 78 The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use Time external temperature display Set the time refer to page 78 External temperature warning If the display drops to 37 F 3 C a signal sounds and a warning light lights up There is the increased danger of ice Ice on roads
273. pened The vehicle locks automatically after a short period of time if a door is not opened gt Lock after start to drive The vehicle locks automatically after you drive away 37 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Opening and closing fc Door locks Unlock button All doors O Last seat position auto O Lock if no door is opened O Lock after start to drive O Flash when lock unlock Unlocking and opening doors gt Press the button The doors are unlocked To open pull the door handle above the armrest gt Pull the door handle above the armrest twice the door is unlocked the first time and opened the second time Locking gt Press the button The doors are locked gt Press the lock button of a door To prevent you from being locked out the opened driver s door cannot be locked using the lock button Trunk lid Note the opening height of the trunk lid During opening the trunk lid pivots back and up Ensure that there is sufficient clear ance when the trunk lid opens otherwise damage may result 38 Opening from the inside Press the button The trunk lid opens unless it has been locked In some market specific versions this button does not exist gt Press on the top half of the BMW emblem gt Press the button on the remote control for approx one second The trunk lid can be opened Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 I
274. per system 63 Winter storage care 260 Winter tires suitable tires 235 Winter tires tread 233 Wiper blades changing 245 Wiper fluid 65 Wood care 259 Wordmatch principle naviga tion 25 Working in the engine com partment 238 Wrench screwdriver refer to Onboard vehicle tool kit 245 X Xenon headlights bulb re placement 246 Y Your individual vehicle set tings refer to Personal Pro file 32 285 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 More about BMW The Ultimate bmwusa com Driving Machine Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 01 40 2 954 104 ue
275. pets and floor mats the paragraph that begins Only use floor mats should be disregarded and the following language should be read in lieu thereof The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you use floor mats that have been identified by it as appropriate for use in your vehicle and that can be properly fixed in place At page 136 under the heading Have maintenance carried out the sentence beginning Have the maintenance carried out should be disregarded and the fol lowing text should be read in lieu thereof Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Addendum 10 TL 12 13 BMW recommends that you have the maintenance carried out by your service center At page 221 under the heading Apps and subheading Requirements the section that begins Use only should be disre garded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends the use of BMW recommended software otherwise there may be malfunctions in system operations At page 228 under the heading Pressure specifications the sentence beginning The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes approved should be disregarded At page 234 under the heading Approved wheels and tires the term Approved should be disregarded and in lieu thereof the term Recommended should be read in its place I
276. played CD Multimedia External devices Select the or amp symbol dF Current playback op mM Random playback The current list of tracks is played back in ran dom order CD Multimedia External devices Open Options a y Random Fast forward reverse gt Press and hold the button Notes Do not expose the audio device to extreme en vironmental conditions such as very high tem peratures refer to the audio device operating instructions Depending on the configuration of the audio files e g bit rates greater than 256 kbit s the files may not play back correctly in each case Information on connection gt The connected audio device is supplied with a max power of 500 mA if supported by the device Therefore do not addition ally connect the device to a socket in the vehicle otherwise playback may be com promised gt Do not use force when plugging the con nector into the USB interface gt Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB audio interface gt Do not connect USB hard drives Do not use the USB audio interface to re charge external devices Bluetooth audio Ata glance gt Music files on external devices such as au dio devices or mobile phones can be played back via Bluetooth 185 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Entertainment _ CD multimedia V V Use of a mobile phone as an audio source refer to page 1
277. ppears in the instru ment cluster The DSC system is switched off Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Driving stability control systems Controls Activating DSC r we Press the button DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator lamp go out Indicator warning lamps When DSC is deactivated DSC OFF is dis played in the instrument cluster amp The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up s DSC is deactivated TRACTION Maximum traction on loose road surfaces Dy namic Traction Control DTC is switched on Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends Activating TRACTION An Press the button ee i i TRACTION is displayed in the instru ment cluster The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster Deactivating TRACTION E or Press the button again a TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica tor lamp go out Indicator warning lamps When DTC is activated TRACTION is dis played in the instrument cluster The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up co OFF Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti vated SPORT Sporty driving with optimized chassis and sus pension during limited driving stabilization Dynamic Traction Control is switched on The driver handles several of the stabilization tasks Activating SPORT Press the button repeatedly until SPORT is selected in the in strument cluster and the DSC OFF indicator lamp is d
278. pprox 20 seconds but are kept in memory They are marked with the symbol shown here Viewing stored Check Control messages gt CHECK CONTROL 1 Press button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display accompa nied by the words CHECK CONTROL 2 Press button 2 If there is no Check Control message this is indicated by CHECK OK If a Check Control message has been stored the corresponding lamp comes on It is accompanied by a text message on the Control Display 3 Press button 1 to check for other mes sages 4 Press button 2 The display again shows the external tem perature and the time Displaying stored Check Control messages aan Press the button 1 2 Vehicle Info 3 Vehicle status 4 Check Control amp Vehicle status 6 GX lt Sa 1 Ta N 5 Select the text message Messages after trip completion Special messages that were displayed during a trip are displayed again after the ignition is switched off Speed limit You can enter a speed and a Check Control message will indicate when you reach this speed This enables you to receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in an urban area for example You are only warned of reaching this 85 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Displays speed a second time if your vehicle speed falls below it again by
279. press the brake and clutch pedals while doing so Sport automatic transmission Press the parking brake switch while the brake is depressed or transmission position P is en gaged Indicator lights The indicator lamp in the instrument PARK cluster goes out Indicator light in Canadian models Malfunction In the event of a failure or malfunction of the parking brake secure the vehicle against roll ing using a wheel chock for example if you leave the vehicle 62 Turn signal high beams 1 High beams 2 Headlamp flasher 3 Turn signal Using turn signals Press the lever beyond the resistance point To switch off manually press the lever to the resistance point Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed Signaling a turn briefly Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash Triple turn signal activation Press the lever to the resistance point The turn signal flashes three times You can be set whether the turn signal should flash once or three times when activated I iii Press the button 2 Settings Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Driving Controls 3 Lighting 4 Triple turn signal _ Lighting Pathway light Os EY Triple turn signal O Daytime running lamps O Welcome light The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use
280. quipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Airbags The following airbags are located under the marked covers 1 Front airbags 2 Side airbags in the seat backrests 3 Knee airbag Front airbags Front airbags help protect the driver and pas senger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot provide ade quate restraint Side airbags In a lateral impact the side airbag protects the side of the body in the chest area 92 Knee airbag The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal impact Protective action Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa tion e g in less severe accidents or rear end collisions Even when all instructions are followed closely injury from contact with the airbags cannot be ruled out in certain situations The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short term and in most cases temporary hearing impairment in sensitive individuals Information on how to ensure the optimal protective effect of the airbags gt Keep ata distance from the airbags gt Always grasp the steering wheel on the steering wheel rim holding your hands at the 3 o clock and 9 o clock positions to keep the danger of injury to your hands or arms as l
281. r Four lashing eyes are provided behind the seats for attaching the cargo straps 134 Things to remember when driving Adhere to the information included with the cargo Straps Lashing eyes on the rear storage shelf Top Saving fuel General information Your vehicle contains advanced technology for the reduction of fuel consumption and emis sions Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif ferent factors The implementation of certain measures driv ing style and regular maintenance refer to page 243 can have an influence on fuel con sumption and on the environmental impact Remove unnecessary cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Things to remember when driving Drivingtips tips Remove attached parts following use Remove auxiliary mirrors or rear mounted lug gage racks after use Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero dynamics and increase the fuel consumption Close both windows An open window causes higher air resistance and thus increases fuel consumption Tires General information Tires can have varying effects on fuel con sumption for example fuel consumption can be influenced by the tire size Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Check and if necessary correct the tire infla tion pressure refer to page 228 at least twice a month and before starting on a
282. r BMW center for additional in formation Maintenance replacement or repair of the emission control devices and systems may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any certified automotive part California Proposition 65 Warning California laws require us to state the following warning Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo bile components and parts including compo nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi cle contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro ductive harm Battery posts terminals and re lated accessories contain lead and lead com pounds Wash your hands after handling Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 oo Notes Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly Your vehicle is covered by the fol lowing warranties gt New Vehicle Limited Warranty gt Rust Perforation Limited Warranty gt Federal Emissions System Defect War ranty gt Federal Emissions Performance Warranty gt California Emis
283. r after a continuous tone sounds High protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected False warnings PDC may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range gt In heavy rain gt When sensors are very dirty or covered in ice gt When sensors are covered in snow On rough road surfaces In large buildings with right angles and smooth walls e g in underground ga rages In heavy exhaust gt Due to other ultrasound sources e g sweeping machines high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights 107 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Driving comfort Switching on automatically Visual warning Engage reverse gear with the engine running The approach of the vehicle to an object is or the ignition switched on shown on the Control Display Objects that are farther away are displayed on the Control Dis Switching off automatically when play before a signal sounds The display ap driving forward pears as soon as PDC is switched on The system switches off when a certain dis f tance or speed is exceeded Malfunction Switch on the system again if necessary ip y a indicator ae deta Za cluster comes on as failed Signal tones When approaching an object an intermittent tone is sounded that indicates the position of the object For example if an object is de To ensure full operability tected to the
284. r are displayed on the split screen Accepting the detour Detour In the event of special hazards e g objects on the road a message is displayed without a de tour suggestion Detours can also be accepted if the traffic messages are called up in the list 1 Navigation 2 Map 3 AX Traffic Info 4 Detour information 5 Detour Dynamic destination guidance The route is automatically changed in the event of traffic obstructions gt The system does not point out traffic ob structions along the original route gt Traffic bulletins continue to be displayed on the map gt Depending on road type and the kind and extent of the traffic obstruction the calcu lated route may lead through the traffic ob struction gt Dangerous situations are displayed regard less of the setting 158 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 What to do if Navigation What to do if gt The current transmission position cannot be displayed The vehicle is located in an unrecognized region is in a poor reception area or the system is currently determining the posi tion Reception is usually best when you have an unobstructed view of the sky gt The destination without street information is not used for route guidance When city has been input no downtown can be determined Input any street in the selected city and start destination guid ance gt The destination is not used f
285. r until the desired setting is reached and press the controller Selecting the zoom Display the video image on the entire screen 1 Turn the controller during playback 2 Open Options 175 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Entertainment _ CD multimedia 3 Additional options 4 Zoom mode Options O zoom mode Select title Viewing angle Main menu Back Selecting a track DVD video 1 Turn the controller when the DVD menu is displayed Open Options Additional options Select title Select the desired track a 2 Selecting the camera angle The availability of a different camera angle de pends on the DVD and the current DVD track 1 Turn the controller during playback Open Options Additional options Viewing angle a ee oS Select the desired camera angle Opening the main menu back These functions are not contained on every DVD Therefore they may not be available for use 176 Notes CD DVD player Do not remove the cover BMW CD DVD players and changers are officially designated Class 1 laser products Do not operate if the cover is damaged otherwise severe eye damage can result lt CDs and DVDs Use of CDs DVDs gt Do not use self recorded CDs DVDs with labels applied as these can be come detached during playback due to heat buildup and can cause irrep arable damage to the device gt Only use round CDs DVDs with a standar
286. re can lead to high temperatures brake wear and possibly even brake failure Do not drive in neutral Never drive with the transmission in neu tral with the engine switched off or with the clutch depressed otherwise you will have nei ther the braking action of the engine or nor its power assistance when braking or steering Brake disc corrosion Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina tion on the brake pads are furthered by gt Low mileage gt Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all gt Infrequent use of the brakes Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure that must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the discs Is not reached Should corrosion form on the brake discs the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef fect that generally cannot be corrected Condensation under the parked vehicle When using the automatic climate control condensation water develops that exits under neath the vehicle Therefore traces of condensed water under the vehicle are normal Loading Overloading the vehicle To avoid exceeding the approved carry ing Capacity of the tires never overload the ve hicle Overloading can lead to overheating and increases the rate at which damage develops Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Things to remember when driving inside the tires This could result in a sudden loss of tire inflation pressure lt Secure he
287. re size the manufacturer of your ve hicle recommends certain tire brands These can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall With proper use these tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling Retreaded tires The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec ommend the use of retreaded tires Retreaded tires Possibly substantial variations in the de sign and age of the tire casing structures can limit service life and have a negative impact on road safety lt Winter tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures below 45 F 7 C Although so called all season M S tires do provide better winter traction than summer tires they do not provide the same level of per formance as winter tires Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires then display a corresponding sign in the field of vision You can obtain this sign from the tire specialist or from your service center Wheels and tires Maximum speed for winter tires Do not exceed the maximum speed for the winter tires otherwise tire damage and ac cidents can occur Run flat tires For your own safety only use run flat tires No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire Your service center will be glad to advise you Rotating wheels between axles The manufacturer of your vehicle advises aga
288. rearview and exterior mirrors is controlled by two photo cells in the interior rearview mirror One photo cell is in the mirror frame or in the mirror see arrow the other is on the back of gt For folding back mirrors that were folded Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto matically at a speed of approx 25 mph 40 km h the mirror Fold in the mirror in a car wash For proper operation Before entering an automatic car wash gt Keep the photocells clean fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the button otherwise they could be damaged de pending on the width of the vehicle lt gt Do not cover the area between the inside rearview mirror and the windshield Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are heated automatically while the engine is running or the ignition is switched on 53 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Adjusting Steering wheel gt On the LED lights up gt Off the LED goes out General information Do not adjust while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving otherwise an unexpected movement could result in an accident Adjusting Fold the lever down 2 Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seating posi tion 3 Fold the lever back Do not use force to swing the lever back Do not use force to swing the lever back up otherwise the mechanism will be dam aged lt
289. related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Controls WS OZ SZ S f Volume on off Change wave band Change entertainment sources Change station track a fF OO N Programmable memory buttons Sound output Switching on off When the ignition is switched off press ON OFF button on the radio 164 Muting When the ignition is switched on or the engine is running press the ON OFF button on the radio AM FM station Selecting a station 1 Radio 2 FM or AM 3 Select the desired station Q Manual 93 1 94 7 WFME J 95 5 by PAT 96 3 Musica 97 1 and R amp B 97 9 All saved stations are stored for the remote control currently in use Changing the station Turn the controller and press it or gt Press the button or Press the buttons on the steering wheel refer to page 14 Storing a station 1 Radio 2 FM or AM Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Entertainment 3 Highlight the desired station T A Manual 93 1 94 7 WFME 95 5 by PAT v 96 3 Musica 97 1 and R amp B 97 9 4 Press the controller for an extended period 5 Select the desired memory location The stations are stored for the remote control currently in use The stations can also be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons refer to page 24 Selecting a station manually Station selec
290. rge serv 7 ice ig E mail from mobile phone Filtering the message list The message list can be filtered if more than one type of message exists 1 Filter 1 amp Messages Filter Service message Mylnfo E Hemden und Textilreinigung Concierge ci Tankstelle Tank amp Shop Concierge fi Hotel Munich 2 Select the type of message gt AI All messages are displayed gt E mail Only e mails from the mobile phone are displayed gt Service message Only messages from the BMW Assist Concierge service and My Info are dis played gt Text message Only text messages from the mobile phone are displayed Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Office Communication Deleting messages Messages from the Concierge service and My Info can be deleted Delete a message Office Messages Select the desired message Open Options A YS Delete message Delete all messages Office Messages Open Options se YS Delete all messages or Delete service messages Text messages Calling the sender of a text message 1 Select the desired message 2 y Select the symbol Saving the sender in the contacts 1 Highlight the desired message 2 Open Options 3 Store as new contact or Add to existing contact Using contact data Contact data from appointments tasks text messages e mails and notes can be saved or selected refer to page
291. rifications will supersede the materials con tained in that document 1 Where the terms service center the ser vice center your service center service specialist or service are used in the Owner s Manual we wanted to clarify that the terms refer to a BMW dealer s service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications Where the text of the Owner s Manual con tains an affirmative instruction to contact a service center or your service center we wanted to clarify that BMW recom mends that if you are faced with one of the situations addressed by that text you con tact or seek the assistance of a BMW dealer s service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accor dance with BMW specifications While BMW of North America LLC at no cost to you will pay for repairs required by the limited warranties provided with respect to your vehicle and for maintenance under the Maintenance Program during the appli cable warranty and maintenance coverage periods you are free to elect both during those periods and thereafter to have main tenance and repair work provided by other service centers or repair shops Where the Owner s Manual makes refer ence to par
292. rk bulb replacement on xenon headlamps that text should be disre garded and in lieu thereof the following text should be read Xenon headlamp work or replacement can cause serious and fatal injuries In the text that follows where it reads h ave any work on the xenon light ing system the following words should be read as preceding that passage It is strongly suggested that you At page 249 under the Battery replace ment section the text should be disre garded and in lieu thereof the following text should be read Use of recommended vehicle batteries The manufacturer of your vehicle recom mends that you use vehicle batteries that it has tested and recommends for use in your vehicle otherwise the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully available After a battery replacement the manufac turer of your vehicle recommends that you have the battery registered on your vehicle by a service center to ensure that all com fort functions are fully available and that any check control messages of these comfort functions are no longer displayed Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Contents The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic or item is by using the index refer to page 274 6 Notes Ata glance 14 Cockpit 20 iDrive 27 Voice activation system Controls 32 Opening and closing 48 Adjusting 55 Transporting chi
293. rol DTC The concept The DTC system and the TRACTION program are a variant of the DSC in which forward mo mentum is optimized The system ensures maximum forward mo mentum on special road conditions e g unp lowed snowy roads but driving stability is lim ited It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri ate caution You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances gt When driving in slush or on uncleared snow covered roads gt When rocking the vehicle or driving off in deep snow or on loose surfaces gt When driving with snow chains Deactivating activating Dynamic Traction Control DTC The system and program can be deactivated activated via Dynamic Driving Control refer to page 103 Dynamic Driving Control The concept Dynamic Driving Control can be used to adjust the driving dynamics of the vehicle Several programs are available for this purpose one program can be activated at a time using the Dynamic Driving Control buttons 102 Press the button Program DSC OFF Sa TRACTION SPORT SPORT COMFORT KA Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends To increase vehicle stability activate DSC again as soon as possible Deactivating DSC DSC OFF Press the button for no longer than lt lt approx 10 seconds until the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the instrument cluster and DSC OFF a
294. rol is removed from the ig nition lock refer to page 57 Before leaving the vehicle ensure that the transmission position P is engaged otherwise the vehicle may begin to roll Engaging transmission position P Select only when the vehicle is stationary 69 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Driving Press button P Kickdown Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance Press the accelerator past the resistance point Sport program and manual mode M S Press the selector lever from gear position D to the left to activate the Sport program Sport program This position is recommended for a perform ance oriented driving style The gear position and the engaged gear are displayed in the instrument cluster for in stance 1 Manual mode When you press the selector lever forward or backward or when you pull one of the shift paddles manual mode is activated and the gear is changed The gear position and the engaged gear are displayed in the instrument cluster for in stance M1 70 The transmission provides assistance in the following situations gt Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a feasible combina tion of engine and vehicle speed thus for example a downshift that would cause the engine to overrev will not be executed by the system gt When the vehicle stops the transmission automatically shifts down to first
295. rols Transporting children safely Seat position Before installing a child restraint fixing system move the passenger seat as far back and as high as possible to obtain the best possible position for the belt Backrest width 1 Adjust the backrest width to its widest set ting refer to page 50 2 Install the child seat Backrest width for the child seat Before installing a child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat the back rest width must be opened completely Do not change the adjustment after this otherwise the stability of the child seat will be reduced Child seat security The safety belt for the passenger can be locked to prevent it from being pulled out when it is used to secure child restraint systems To lock the safety belt 1 Secure the child restraint fixing system with the belt 2 Pull out the belt webbing completely 3 Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and pull it taut against the child restraint fixing system The safety belt is locked To unlock the safety belt 1 Open the belt buckle 56 2 Remove the child restraint fixing system 3 Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com pletely Child restraint fixing system with tether strap For Canadian Customers only The following statement is required by Trans port Canada This vehicle is not equipped with user ready tether anchorages As such neither a child re straint system nor a booster cushion
296. rrently in use H3 This symbol is displayed in the status line when the audio signal is digital When tuning to a station with a digital signal it may take several seconds for the station to be played back in digital quality Note on HD stations whose station name ends in HD or with HD1 In areas in which the station is not continu ously received in digital mode the playback switches between analog and digital reception In this case switch off digital radio reception Note on HD multicast stations whose station name ends in HD2 HDS In areas in which the station is not continu ously received in digital mode the audible sig nal may be interrupted for several seconds This is reception related Displaying additional information Some stations broadcast additional informa tion on the current track such as the name of the artist 1 Select the desired station 2 Open Options 3 Station info Selecting a substation Ol This symbol indicates that a main station also broadcasts additional substations The station name of the main station ends in HD1 Station names of the substations end in HD2 HD3 etc 1 Select the desired station 166 2 Press the controller 3 Select the substation When reception is poor the substation is muted Satellite radio General information The channels are offered in predefined pack ages The packages must be enabled by tele phone Navi
297. rtent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear could lead to engine damage lt Reverse gear Select only when the vehicle is stationary When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left a slight resistance needs to be overcome Malfunction ooon i _ The warning lamp lights up yellow A message appears on the Control Dis play In addition a signal sounds L The clutch temperature is too high 65 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Driving 8 gear Sport automatic transmission Transmission positions D Drive automatic position Position for normal vehicle operation All for ward gears are available Under normal operating conditions fuel con sumption is lowest when you are driving in po sition D Kickdown Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance Press on the accelerator beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position R is Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary N is Neutral The vehicle can roll N remains engaged after the engine is switched off if the remote control remains in the ignition lock This function can be used in an automatic car wash refer to page 25 7 for example P is automatically engaged after ap prox 30 minutes P Park The rear wheels are locked P is engaged automatically when the following conditions are met gt The driver s door is opened while the en gine is running the safety belt is not fas
298. rtunity refer also to Adding engine oil below Engine oil level too high Have this checked Too much engine oil Have the vehicle checked immedi ately otherwise surplus oil can lead to en gine damage lt 240 gt Measurement inactive Have this checked Do not add engine oil It is possi ble to continue driving Note the newly cal culated remaining mileage until the next oil service refer to page 80 Have the system checked as soon as possible Adding engine oil Depending on the engine the filler neck is lo cated in the middle as shown or at the front corner in the engine cover Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart 1 liter of oil only after a corresponding message ap pears on the Control Display Add oil promptly Add oil within the next 125 miles 200 km otherwise engine damage could result lt Protect children Keep oil grease etc out of reach of chil dren and heed the warnings on the containers to prevent health risks lt Oil types for refilling Notes No oil additives Oil additives may lead to engine dam age lt Viscosity classes of engine oils When selecting an engine oil ensure that the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity classes SAE OW 40 SAE OW 30 SAE 5W 40 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Engine compartment Mobility or SAE 5W 30 or malfunctions or engine dam age may occur lt The engine oil quality is critical for
299. rward while moving them to their uppermost position and leaning the backrests forward Otherwise the seats could hit and damage the seal on the wind shield and the sun visor Sensors cameras To clean the sensors or cameras of equipment such as the High beam Assistant or Park Dis tance Control PDC use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass cleaner Displays screens Clean the displays with an anti static micro fiber cloth 260 Cleaning displays Do not use chemical or household cleansers Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit Otherwise they could affect or damage surfa ces or electrical components Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do not use abrasive materials otherwise damage can result lt Long term vehicle storage Your service center can advise you on what to consider when storing the vehicle for longer than three months Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Care Mobility 261 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 Reference This chapter contains technical data short commands for the voice activation system and an index that will quickly take you to the information you need Reference Technical data Technical data special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as
300. s carpets and any other objects out of the area of motion of the pedals otherwise the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas tened again when they are returned after being removed such as for cleaning lt Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet or there is heavy rain briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles Ensure that this action does not endanger other road users The heat generated in this process helps dry the brake discs and pads In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it Hills Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required Otherwise the brake system may overheat re sulting in a reduction in the brake system effi ciency You can increase the engine s braking effect by shifting down going all the way to first gear if necessary Downshifting in manual mode of the 8 gear Sport automatic transmission refer to page 67 Downshifting in manual mode of the 7 gear Sport automatic transmission with dual clutch refer to page 70 132 Things to remember when driving Avoid load on the brakes Avoid placing excessive load on the brake system Light but consistent brake pres su
301. s the charging function of the mobile phone may be limited and functions may not be executed When using the mobile phone via the vehicle note the operating instructions of the mobile phone Pairing unpairing the mobile phone General information The following functions are available gt Use of a mobile phone as a telephone gt Use of a mobile phone as an additional te lephone Use of a mobile phone as an audio source Use of an audio device as an audio source refer to page 185 Requirements gt The mobile phone is suitable refer to page 194 The mobile phone is ready for operation gt Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on the mobile phone gt Bluetooth presettings may need to be made on the mobile phone e g for a con nection without confirmation or visibility refer to the mobile phone operating in structions gt Deactivate Bluetooth audio if necessary A number with at least four and a maximum of 16 digits was defined as the Bluetooth passkey It is only required once for pairing gt The ignition is switched on Activating deactivating Bluetooth Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere 1 Telephone 2 Open Options 3 Bluetooth ASS Options Bluetooth telephone O Bluetooth audio LY Office Telephone EY Bluetooth Bluetooth info O Additional telephone Additional functions Activating deactivating the additional functions Activate the functi
302. s computed based on the distance traveled since the last time the computer was reset Calling up information m nZ With the trip computer refer to page 75 you can have the average consumption displayed for an additional distance To reset the average consumption press the button on the turn indicator lever for ap prox 2 seconds Current fuel consumption Displays the current fuel consumption This al lows you to see whether your current driving style is conducive to fuel economy with mini Range mum exhaust emissions Press the button on the turn indicator lever The following items of information are dis played in the order listed Average speed Displays on the Control Display The computer can also be opened via iDrive Average fuel consumption Current fuel consumption No information 1 Vehicle Info To set the corresponding units of measure units of measure refer to page 78 VV VV OV Range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel The range is calculated 75 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Displays 2 Onboard info or Trip computer tE Vehicle Info Onboard info Trip computer Vehicle status Ef Onboard info 1 49 450 km e 230 km To dest 02 15 Arrival 10 5 1 100 km Cons 75 0 km h Speed Range gt Range Distance to destination gt Estimated time of arrival if a destinat
303. s not properly tight ened the OBD system may conclude that fuel vapor is escaping If the cap is then tightened the display should go out in a short time Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Replacing components Mobility Replacing components Vehicle equipment 3 Press the hook 4 Pull the wiper blade downward out of the This chapter describes all series equipment as Holder and remove tt toward the coder well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also eee describes equipment that may not be found in Do not fold out the wiper arms your vehicle for instance due to the selected To avoid damage make sure that the special equipment or the country version This wiper arms are resting against the windshield systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Lamp and bulb replacement General information Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu tion to vehicle safety Tool kit The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to your service center if you are unfamiliar with them or they are not described here You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at your service center Danger of burns The onboard vehicle tool kit is stored in a Only change bulbs when they are cool pouch under the cargo floor panel otherwise there is the danger of getting burned
304. service center Condition Based Service CBS Sensors and special algorithms take into ac count the driving conditions of your vehicle Based on this Condition Based Service deter mines the maintenance requirements The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance you need to your user profile Details on the service requirements refer to page 80 can be displayed on the Control Dis play Service data in the remote control Information on the required maintenance is continuously stored in the remote control Your service center will read out this data and suggest the right array of service procedures for your vehicle Therefore hand your service specialist the re mote control that you used most recently Storage periods Storage periods during which the vehicle bat tery was disconnected are not taken into ac count If this occurs have a service center update the time dependent maintenance procedures such as checking brake fluid and if necessary changing the engine oil and the microfilter activated charcoal filter Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty In formation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod els for additional information on service re quirements Maintenance and repair should be performed by your service center
305. service center will be glad to advise you 234 Changing wheels and tires Mounting Information on mounting tires Have mounting and balancing performed only by a service center or tire specialist If this work is not carried out properly there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards lt Wheel and tire combination Information on the correct wheel tire combina tion and rim versions for your vehicle can be obtained from your service center Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the function of a variety of systems such as ABS or DSC To maintain good handling and vehicle re sponse use only tires with a single tread con figuration from a single manufacturer Following tire damage have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible Approved wheels and tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recom mends that you use only wheels and tires that have been approved for your particular vehicle model For example despite having the same official size ratings variations can lead to body con tact and with it the risk of severe accidents The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval uate non approved wheels and tires to deter mine if they are suited for use and therefore cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehi cle if they are mounted lt Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Recommended tire brands For each ti
306. sh The tracks found are listed in alphabetical order Not all categories need to be selected For example to search for all tracks by a cer tain artist call up that artist only All of the tracks by that artist are then displayed 7 Start play The list of tracks is repeated automatically Restarting the music search New search 179 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Entertainment _ CD multimedia Music search by voice Albums Instructions for voice activation system refer All stored albums listed in order of their stor to page 27 age dates 1 M Press the button on the steering wheel Audio CD 2 Music search O Compressed audio files 3 Open the desired category e g Select iaa o 1 CD Multimedia 4 Say the desired enue in ie lias 2 Music collection 5 Select other cavegoleee l you wish d Gebe hedesredabum Ieee Bie Crees IU ae Depending on the album the tracks or the Say the voice command and the name of the subdirectories of the album are displayed desired track in a single command The first track is played automatically if possible Current playback The list of tracks that was generated last by GF Music collection the music search or the album that was se Q Music search lected last Current playback 1 roll Top 50 1 CD Multimedia Audio cb 1 2 Music collection fps 3 Current playback Vv Frank LIEBLINGSSONGS 1 GF Music collection
307. sing contact data Contact data from appointments tasks text messages e mails and notes can be saved or selected refer to page 212 Reading the appointment out loud Read the appointment out loud refer to page 212 Tasks Displaying the task list Display tasks that are due within the next 90 days 1 Office 2 Tasks Sorting the task list 1 Select the header in the task list Tasks Subject Auto test Task 1 Task 3 2 Select the sorting criterion gt Priority gt Subject gt Due date Displaying the task 1 Select the desired task 2 Scroll in the task if necessary gt Turn the controller gt 0 LB Select the symbol Using contact data Contact data from appointments tasks text messages e mails and notes can be saved or selected refer to page 212 Reading the task out loud Read the task out loud refer to page 212 Notes Displaying notes 1 Office 2 Notes All notes are displayed Displaying the note 1 Select the desired note EA Warners A A Team Meeting organisieren Name Fahrzeug buchen 2 Scrollin the note if necessary gt Turn the controller gt 1 E Select the symbol Using contact data Contact data from appointments tasks text messages e mails and notes can be saved or selected refer to page 212 Reading the note out loud Read the note out loud refer to page 212 211 Onl
308. sion Control System Lim ited Warranty Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating con ditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to de liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region you may be required to adapt your ve hicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region In such case please contact Customer Relations for further information Maintenance Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Specifications for required maintenance meas ures gt BMW Maintenance system gt Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models gt Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications this could result in seri 8 ous damage to the vehicle Such damage is not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty Data memory Numerous electronic components in
309. sition N is engaged gt When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti vated gt When DSC or ABS is intervening Cruise control is not deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal Once the accelerator pedal is released the stored speed is achieved again and maintained Warning light s A message appears on the Control 0 Display The warning light comes on for ex ample when cruise control has been deacti vated as a result of DSC intervention Deactivating the system gt Press the lever upward or downward twice arrow 3 gt Switch off the ignition The stored speed is cleared Resuming a speed stored beforehand Press the button arrow 4 The last stored speed is resumed and maintained Displays in the instrument cluster 1 I l B 2 Selected speed is displayed briefly j j 1 Stored speed If mph or km h temporarily appears in the instrument cluster display it is possible Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Driving comfort Controls that the system prerequisites for operation are currently not met Call up Check Control messages refer to page 85 Malfunction a The warning light comes on when the M system has failed A message appears on the Control Display More information refer to page 84 Park Distance Control PDC The concept PDC supports you when parking You are alerted that you are slowly approach ing an ob
310. ss the tracks are played in se quence Observe the following during the storage proc ess Do not switch to the CD DVD player and do not remove the CD DVD from the CD DVD player as this will interrupt the storage process You can switch to the other audio sources without interrupting the storage process Tracks from the current CD DVD that have already been stored can be called up Interrupting storage 1 CD Multimedia 2 CD DVD 178 3 Storing GF CD DVD Storing amp Best of Brothers in arms amp Mezzanine G Audio CD lela 4 Cancel storing The storage process is interrupted and can be continued at any time Continuing the storage process 1 CD Multimedia 2 CD DVD 3 amp Select the symbol for the CD DVD player 4 Continue storing Storage of the CD DVD continues at the begin ning of the track at which storage was inter rupted Album information During storage information such as the name of the artist is stored with the track if this infor mation is available in the vehicle database or on the CD To update the database contact your service center Storing from a USB device To store music a suitable device must be con nected to the USB interface in the glove com partment gt Suitable devices USB mass storage devi ces such as USB flash drives or MP3 play ers with a USB interface gt Unsuitable devices USB hard drives USB hubs
311. ssible for the vehicle to roll such as in an automatic car wash follow the instructions in Car washes re fer to page 257 Starting the engine Enclosed areas Do not let the engine run in enclosed areas otherwise breathing of exhaust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness and death The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas lt 58 Unattended vehicle Do not leave the car unattended with the engine running otherwise it presents a poten tial source of danger Before leaving the car with the engine running set the parking brake and place the transmis sion in position P or neutral to prevent the car from moving lt Frequent starting in quick succession Avoid repeated futile attempts at starting the car and avoid starting the car frequently in quick succession Otherwise the fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned and there is the danger of overheating and damaging the catalytic converter lt Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary Start driving right away but at moderate engine speeds Manual transmission Remote control in the ignition lock or with Comfort Access inside the vehicle refer to page 39 1 Depress the brake pedal 2 Depress the clutch pedal 3 Press the Start Stop button The starter operates automatically for a certain time and stops automatically as soon as the engine has started
312. ssion position P is en gaged automatically To make it possible for the vehicle to roll such as in an automatic car wash follow the instructions in Car washes re fer to page 257 Start Stop button a A Pressing the Start Stop button switches the radio ready state or the ignition on and off The engine starts when you press the Start Stop button and if the car has manual trans mission also depress the clutch or if the car has automatic transmission also depress the brake 57 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Driving Radio ready state Individual electrical consumers can operate The time and the external temperature are dis played in the instrument cluster Radio ready state is switched off automatically gt When the remote control is removed from the ignition lock gt In cars with Comfort Access by touching the surface above the door lock locking refer to page 40 Ignition on All electrical consumers can operate The od ometer and trip odometer are displayed in the instrument cluster To save battery power when the engine is off switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems power consumers Radio ready state and ignition off All indicator and warning lamps as well as dis plays in the instrument cluster go out Sport automatic transmission In certain situations transmission position P is engaged automatically To make it po
313. start refer to Starting the engine 58 Combination instrument refer to Instrument cluster 16 Combination switch refer to Turn signal high beams headlight flasher 62 Combination switch refer to Washer wiper system 63 Comfort Access 39 Comfort Access battery re placement 41 Comfort Access in a car wash 40 Comfort area refer to Around the center console 18 COMFORT program Dy namic Driving Control 103 Compartment for remote control refer to Ignition lock 57 Compartments refer to Stor age compartments 125 Compass 118 Computer 75 Computer displays on the Control Display 75 Concierge service 217 Condensation under the vehi cle 132 Condition Based Service CBS 243 Confirmation signals for lock Ing unlocking the vehicle 36 Connecting mobile phone refer to Pairing the mobile phone 195 Consumption refer to Aver age fuel consumption 75 Contacts 206 Control Display 20 Control Display care 260 Control Display settings 80 Controller 21 Controls and displays 14 Control systems driving sta bility 101 Convenient loading 35 Convenient opening and clos ing retractable hardtop 35 Convenient operation win dow 35 Convertible top refer to Re tractable hardtop 44 Coolant 241 Coolant checking the level 241 Coolant temperature 74 Cooling maximum 113 Cooling system refer to Cool ant 241 Corrosion on brake discs 132 Courtesy lights refer to Inte rior lights 91 Cradle
314. station recommenda tion 153 Gear display 7 gear auto matic transmission 69 Gear display 8 gear auto matic transmission 68 General driving notes 130 Glove compartment 124 GPS navigation refer to Navi gation system 140 Grilles refer to Air vents 109 Gross vehicle weight refer to Weights 264 H Handbrake refer to Parking brake 61 Hand held transmitter alter nating code 117 Hardtop 44 Hazard warning system 18 HD Radio 165 Head airbags 92 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Everything from A to Z Reference Headlamp control auto matic 88 Headlamps care 258 Headlamps cleaning 64 Headlight courtesy delay fea ture 88 Headlight flasher 62 Headlight flasher indicator lamp 17 Headliner 19 Heatable mirrors 53 Heatable rear win dow 111 114 Heating 109 Heating mirrors 53 Heating seats 50 Heavy cargo stowing 133 Height adjustment seats 48 Height adjustment steering wheel 54 Height refer to Dimen sions 264 High beam Assistant 89 High beams 62 High beams low beams refer to High beam Assistant 89 High beams headlight flasher 89 High beams indicator lamp 17 High pressure washers 257 Hills 132 Hill start assistant refer to Drive off assistant 104 Holder for beverages 126 Holder for remote control re fer to Ignition lock 57 Homepage 6 Hood 238 Horn 14 Hot exhaust system 131 Hotline 219 House number entering for navigation 143
315. t Playback lists gt Information type of music artist and if available composer album track gt Additionally for USB devices file directory composer Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in the Latin alphabet Starting the track search 1 CD Multimedia External devices Select the or symbol QO Search Select the desired category e g Genre or Artist All entries are displayed in a list oS TS Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 CD multimedia Entertainment gt Open A Z search and input the de sired entry When a letter is entered the results are filtered using this letter as the first letter If multiple letters are entered all results that contain that se quence are displayed gt Select the desired entry from the list GF USB audio JUKEBOX Browse directory Genre All genres All artists All composers All albums All tracks Start play 6 Select other categories if you wish Not all categories need to be selected For example if all of the tracks by a certain ar tist are to be displayed call up that artist only All of the tracks by that artist are then displayed 7 Start play Restarting a track search New search Playback lists Calling up playback lists 1 CD Multimedia 2 External devices 3 Select the or amp symbol 4 JF Playlists Current playback List of tracks currently being
316. t arrow 3 High beam Assistant The concept When the lights are switched on this system automatically switches the high beams on and off The procedure is controlled by a sensor on the front of the interior rearview mirror The as sistant ensures that the high beams are switched on whenever the traffic situation al lows The driver can intervene at any time and switch the high beams on and off as usual Activating the High beam Assistant 1 Turn the light switch to position 2 With the low beams switched on briefly push the turn indicator lever in the direc tion of the high beam T When the lights are switched on the high beams are switched on and off automati cally The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you and to adequate illumination e g in towns and cities Switching the high beams on and off manually gt High beams on arrow 1 89 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Lamps gt High beams off headlamp flasher arrow 2 To reactivate the High beam Assistant briefly push the turn indicator lever toward the high beams Activating deactivating via iDrive 1 Settings 2 Lighting 3 High beam assistant amp Lighting Pathway light Os O Triple turn signal O Daytime running lamps O Welcome light gt R High beam assistant The se
317. t tail light center brake light and turn signal These lights are made using LED technology Please contact your service center in the event of a malfunction Changing wheels Notes Your vehicle is equipped with run flat tires re fer to page 234 as standard equipment They do not need to be replaced immediately in the event of a puncture When mounting new tires or changing from summer to winter tires or vice versa use run flat tires for your own safety 248 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Replacing components Mobility No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire The tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from your service center Jacking points for the vehicle jack The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo cated in the positions shown Lug bolt lock 1 Lug bolt for adapter 2 Adapter in onboard vehicle tool kit Removing 1 Attach adapter 2 to the wheel lug 2 Unscrew lug bolt 1 Remove the adapter after screwing the lug bolt back on Vehicle battery Maintenance The battery is maintenance free i e the elec trolyte will last for the life of the battery Your service center will be glad to advise you on questions regarding the battery Battery replacement Use approved vehicle batteries Only use vehicle batteries that have been approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer otherwise the vehicle could be damaged and s
318. ta Mobile phone data are transmitted again to the vehicle Office information The number of unread messages and active tasks as well as the upcoming appointments are displayed 1 Office 2 Current office 3 Select the desired entry to display details Wa Current office Unread messages M2 N 1 Active tasks 3 09 00 Team Meeting 10 30 Office 205 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Communication Office Contacts Note Equipment version with the mobile phone preparation package At a glance Contacts can be created and edited The con tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as well if this function is supported by the mobile phone The addresses can be adopted as des tinations for navigation and the phone num bers can be dialed Displaying contacts General information 1 Office 2 Contacts EF Office Current office Contacts Messages Calendar Tasks Notes Reminders All contacts are listed in alphabetical order Depending on the number of contacts an A Z search is offered refer to page 25 A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts No sym Inthe vehicle the address has not bol been checked as a destination a In the vehicle the address has been checked as a destination ro Mobile phone 206 Dialing phone numbers 1 Select the desired contact 2 Select the phone number The connection is established Edit
319. tact in vehicle fw Last name S First name gl Home E Business E Mobile 5 Enter refer to page 25 the text In vehicles equipped with a navigation sys tem it is only possible to enter addresses that are contained in the vehicle navigation data This ensures that destination guid ance is possible for all addresses 6 If necessary Store 7 Store contact in vehicle Specifying the home address A home address can be stored It appears at the top of the contact list 1 Home 2 Create acontact 3 Store contact in vehicle My contacts General information List of all contacts stored in the vehicle Displaying contacts 1 Contacts Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Contacts Communication 2 My contacts G Contacts New contact v My contacts All contacts are listed in alphabetical order Depending on the number of contacts an A Z search is offered refer to page 25 A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts No sym Inthe vehicle the address has not bol been checked as a destination a In the vehicle the address has been checked as a destination Of Mobile phone Dialing a phone number 1 Select the desired contact 2 Select the phone number The connection is established Editing a contact 1 Select the desired contact 2 Edit contact contact A Edit contact MUSTERMANN M NCHEN M NCHEN STA a
320. tch the mobile phone off and on again gt Is the ambient temperature too high or low Do not expose the mobile phone to extreme environmental conditions The telephone functions are not available gt Is the mobile phone paired as an additional telephone and is the additional telephone function deactivated Activate the func tion gt Is an outgoing call not possible Connect the mobile phone as a telephone No phone book entries or only some phone book entries are displayed or they are incom plete gt Transmission of the phone book entries is not yet complete gt Itis possible that only the phone book en tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are transmitted gt It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters gt The number of phone book entries to be stored is too high gt Is the data volume of the contact too large e g due to stored information such as notes Reduce the data volume of the con tact gt Is the mobile phone connected as an audio source or additional telephone The mo bile phone must be connected as a tele phone The phone connection quality is poor gt The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the mobile phone can be adjusted depending on the mobile phone gt Insert the mobile phone into the snap in adapter or place it in the area of the center console gt Adjust the volume of the microphone and loudspeakers separately 198
321. tems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Sitting safely The ideal seating position can make a vital contribution to relaxed fatigue free driving The seating position plays an important role in an accident in combination with gt Safety belts refer to page 50 gt Head restraints gt Airbags refer to page 92 Seats Note before adjusting Do not adjust the seat while driving Never attempt to adjust the driver s seat while driving The seat could respond with unexpected movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident lt Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear Do not incline the backrest on the front pas senger side too far to the rear during driving Otherwise there is the danger of sliding under the safety belt in an accident This would elimi 48 nate the protection normally provided by the belt lt Also note the information on safety belt dam age refer to page 51 Adjusting manually Forward backward Pull lever 1 and slide the seat to the desired position After releasing the lever move the seat for ward or back slightly to make sure it engages properly Height Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off as necessary iG So Pull lever 3 and move the backrest to the de sired tilt Distance Backrest tilt Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II
322. th the remote control or via Comfort Access the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time Trunk lid and armed alarm system The trunk lid can be opened using the remote control even if the alarm system is armed Press the button on the remote control for approx one second Note the opening height of the trunk lid During opening the trunk lid pivots back and up Ensure that there is sufficient clear ance when the trunk lid opens otherwise damage may result After the lid is closed it is locked and moni tored again by the alarm system Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation Press the button on the remote control for at least three seconds To switch off the alarm press any button Switching off the alarm gt Unlock the vehicle using the remote con trol refer to page 34 41 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Opening and closing gt Insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock gt With Comfort Access if you are carrying the remote control with you pull on the door handle Indicator lamp on the interior rearview mirror lt lt gt i M E i gt The indicator lamp flashes briefly every 2 seconds The system is armed gt The indicator lamp flashes after locking The doors hood or trunk lid is not closed properly but the rest of the vehicle is se cured
323. therwise it will not be possible to control the vehicle re sponse lt Attaching the tow bar tow rope correctly Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting connecting it to other vehicle parts may cause damage lt gt Switch on the hazard warning system de pending on local regulations gt Ifthe electrical system has failed clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win dow Tow bar The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle please observe the following gt Maneuvering capability is limited during cornering gt The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset Tow rope When starting to tow the vehicle make sure that the tow rope is taut To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on the vehicle components when towing al ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps Attaching the tow rope correctly Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit ting otherwise damage can occur when it is secured on other parts of the vehicle lt 255 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Mobility Breakdown assistance Tow fitting The screw in tow fitting should always be car ried in the vehicle It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW It is stored in the onboard vehicle tool kit under the cargo f
324. ting Symbols and Points of Interest are not displayed Navigation Map Open Options Settings eS SPSS Traffic conditions gray map Symbols in the map view Depending on the scale of the map and the lo cation of the traffic obstruction along the route the symbols for the traffic obstructions are dis played Additional information in the map view Depending on the map scale a traffic obstruc tion s length direction and impact are dis played in the map using triangles or gray bars along the calculated route gt Red traffic congestion Orange stop and go traffic Yellow heavy traffic Green clear roads VV V OV Gray general traffic bulletins such as road construction The displayed information depends on the par ticular traffic information service Filtering traffic bulletins You can set which traffic bulletins appear on the map 1 Navigation 2 Map 3 Open Options 4 Traffic Info categories 5 Select the desired category Gs Categories EY Traffic flow EY Roadwork O EY Closed roads J amp Traffic disruptions Traffic bulletins of the selected category are displayed on the map gt Traffic bulletins that are relevant to the route are always shown gt For your own safety traffic bulletins that notify you of potentially dangerous situa tions such as wrong way drivers cannot be hidden Destination guidance with traffic bulletins General information
325. tion entry General information The system supports you in entering street names and house numbers by automatically completing the entry and providing entry com parisons refer to page 25 Stored town city and street names can be called up quickly gt Ifthe existing entries should not be changed the entries for the state province and town city can be skipped gt Destination guidance is started to the town city center if no street is entered Entering a state province L iii Press the button 2 Navigation 3 Enter address o Navigation Enter address Address book Last destinations Foints of Interest Map Stored trips Route information 4 Select State Province or the displayed state province Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Destination entry Navigation Entering a town city 1 Select Town City Postal Code or the dis played town city Cy Enter address USA Town City Postal Code BEVERL Street o House number Intersection Accept destination Points of Interest at loc 2 Select letters if necessary The list is narrowed down further with each entry 3 Move the controller to the right 4 Select the name of the town city from the list If there are several towns cities with the same name 1 Change to the list of town city names 2 Highlight the town city 3 Select the town city Entering the postal code 1 Select Town C
326. tion via the frequency 1 Radio 2 FM or AM 3 Manual 4 To select the frequency turn the control ler n FM manual 96 7 400 To store the station press the controller for an extended period Renaming a station An FM station with changing station names can be renamed 1 Radio 2 FM 3 Select the desired station Open Options 5 Rename to If necessary wait for the desired name to be displayed The selected station name is added to the list of current stations and stored stations RDS RDS broadcasts additional information such as the station name in the FM wave band i 2 3 4 s Options yitching the RDS on off Radio EM Open Options RDS LY Split screen Close control display FM O HD Radio Reception O RDS The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use HD Radio reception Many stations broadcast both analog and digi tal signals License conditions HD Radio Technology manufactured under li cense from iBiquity Digital Corporation U S and Foreign Patents HD Radio and the HD HD Radio and Arc logos are proprietary trade marks of iBiquity Digital Corp 165 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Entertainment _ Radio Activating deactivating digital radio reception 1 Radio 2 FM or AM 3 Open Options 4 HD Radio Reception The setting is stored for the remote control cu
327. track Open the CD and Multimedia menu CD and DVD Select a DVD Display the entertainment details on a split screen gt Track e g track 5 or gt C D track e g CD track 5 gt C D on gt Select C D gt C D track lt e g CD 3 track 5 gt C D and multimedia gt C Dk gt D V D e g DVD 3 Entertainment details Music collection Search for music open a menu Open the current playback Open the music collection Play back the music collection Play back the most frequently played tracks Music search Current playback Music collection gt Music collection on gt Top fifty External devices Open the external devices Open the Bluetooth devices External devices Bluetooth 271 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 RGG Short commands of the voice activation system Tone Open the tone settings Tone Telephone Dial a phone number Open the Telephone menu Display the phone book Redialing Display received calls List of messages Open the Bluetooth devices Dial number gt Telephone Phonebook Rediak Received calls gt Vessages Bluetooth Office Open the Office menu Display Office Today Display the contacts Display the messages Display the calendar Display the tasks Display the reminders Offices Current office lt gt Contacts Mess
328. tribution in addition to your temperature specifications will be adapted to outside influences as a result of seasonal changes e g sunlight or window condensation The cooling function is switched on automati cally with the AUTO program Switching on off A Press the button Manual air distribution and air flow rate are activated when the AUTO program is deactivated AUTO program climate level The climate levels can be used to vary the in tensity when the AUTO program is switched on For example air flow is adjusted automati cally to optimize climate control When the AUTO program is switched on the climate level of the AUTO program can be se lected using the buttons for controlling the manual air flow rate The selected climate level is displayed by an LED Convertible program When the hardtop is open the convertible pro gram is activated as well In the convertible program the automatic climate control is opti mized for driving with the hardtop open In ad dition the air flow rate is increased as vehicle speed increases The effectiveness of the convertible program can be enhanced considerably by installing the wind deflector Automatic recirculated air mode recirculated air mode oN Switch on the desired operating if mode by pressing this button re Gs peatedly a a gt LED off outside air flows in continuously 113 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II
329. tructions under Transporting children safely refer to page 55 lt Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system The front passenger airbags may be deacti vated if adolescents and adults sit in certain positions the indicator lamp for the front pas senger airbags comes on In this case change the sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out If the desired airbag status cannot be achieved by changing the sitting position do not transport the passenger in the vehicle To make sure that occupation of the seat cushion can be detected correctly gt Do not attach seat covers seat cushion padding ball mats or other items to the passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by BMW gt Do not place any objects on the front pas senger seat gt Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below 93 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Safety Status of passenger airbags The indicator lamp for the front passenger air bags indicates the operating status of the front and side airbags on the front passenger side depending on the seat occupation The indica tor lamp shows whether the passenger airbags are activated or deactivated gt The indicator lamp lights up when a child who Is properly seated in a child restraint system intended for that purpose is de tected on the seat or th
330. try if the spoken language and the language of the system differ gt Say the letters smoothly and avoid exag gerating the pronunciation and inserting lengthy pauses between the letters gt The methods of entry depend on the navi gation data in use and the country and lan guage settings Entering the address in a command 1 Ko wheel Press the button on the steering Enter address Wait for a request from the system Say the address in the suggested order oe o Continue making the entry as prompted by the system If necessary individually name the sepa rate components of the address e g the town city 148 Entering a town city separately The town city can be said as a complete word With the destination entry menu displayed 1 Gs Press the button on the steering wheel 2 City or Spell city 3 Wait for the system to prompt you for the town city 4 Say the name of the town city or name at least the first three letters Depending on the entry up to 20 towns cities may be suggested 5 Select a location gt Select a recommended town city Yes gt Select a different town city New entry gt Select an entry Entry lt for instance entry 2 gt Spell an entry Spell city 6 Continue making the entry as prompted by the system If there are several towns cities with the same name Townsi cities of the same name are grouped in a list and displayed as one
331. ts and accessories having been approved by BMW those references are intended to reflect that those parts and accessories are recommended by BMW of North America LLC You may elect to use other parts and accessories but if you do we recommend that you make sure that any such parts and or accessories are appropri ate for use on your vehicle At page 7 under the warranty section s dis cussion of homologation where it states that you cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there the text should read that you may not be able to lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there At page 7 in the Parts and accessories section the sentence beginning For your own safety should be disregarded and the following the text should be read in lieu thereof The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends using genuine BMW parts and accessories In the fifth sentence of that paragraph the word cannot should read does not At page 51 in the Checking and replacing safety belts section the text beginning Have the work performed only by your ser vice center should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof BMW recommends having this work performed by a service center as it is important that this safety feature functions properly At page 132 under the heading Objects in the area around the pedals and at page 260 under the heading Car
332. tting is stored for the remote control currently in use System limits Personal responsibility The High beam Assistant cannot serve as a Substitute for the driver s personal judg ment of when to use the high beams There fore manually switch off the high beams in sit uations where this is required to avoid a safety risk The system is not fully functional in situations such as the following and driver intervention may be necessary gt In very unfavorable weather conditions such as fog or heavy precipitation gt In detecting poorly lit road users such as pedestrians cyclists horseback riders and wagons when driving close to train or ship traffic and at animal crossings gt In tight curves on hilltops or in depres sions in cross traffic or half obscured on coming traffic on freeways 90 gt In poorly lit towns and cities and in the presence of highly reflective signs At low speeds When the windshield in front of the interior rearview mirror is fogged over dirty or cov ered with stickers etc Sensor view field The view field of the sensor is located on the front of the interior rearview mirror Do not cover this area with stickers etc Clean the view field refer to page 260 Instrument lighting The parking lights or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness LL majana gt SEI 1 Push button 1 up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol app
333. tuations gt An incorrect compass direction is shown Setting right hand left hand steering gt The cardinal direction displayed does not Your digital compass is factory set to right change even if the direction of travel hand or left hand steering in accordance with changes your vehicle gt Not all compass directions are shown Setting the language Procedure You can set the language of the display 1 Make sure that there are no large metal ob Press the adjustment button for 12 13 sec jects or overhead power lines in the vicinity ondes Briefly press the adjustment button 119 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Controls Interior equipment again to switch between English E and Ger man O The setting is automatically saved after approx 10 seconds Ashtray Opening Press the opened cover beyond the resistance point refer to arrow The ashtray can now be removed With the engine running or the ignition switched on press in the cigarette lighter The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out Danger of burns Only hold the hot lighter by its head oth erwise there is the danger of getting burned Switch off the ignition and take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children cannot use the lighter and burn themselves lt Replace the cover after use Replace the lighter or socket cover after use otherwise objects that fal
334. ugh Control Display 26 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Voice activation system Ataglance a glance Voice activation system Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations The concept gt Most functions that are displayed on the Control Display can be operated with the voice activation system using spoken com mands The system prompts you to make your entries gt Functions that can only be used when the vehicle is stationary cannot be operated using the voice activation system gt The system uses a special microphone on the driver s side gt Verbal instructions in the Owner s Manual to use with the voice activation system Requirements Via the Control Display set a language that is also supported by the voice activation system so that the sooken commands can be identi fied Set the language refer to page 80 Using voice activation Activating the voice activation system if Gs Press the button on the steering wheel 2 Wait for the signal 3 Say the command The
335. uipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Ata glance In entering your destination you can select from the following options gt Enter the destination manually see below gt Select the destination from the address book refer to page 144 gt Last destinations refer to page 145 Special destinations refer to page 145 Destination entry via map refer to page 14 7 gt Using the home address as the destina tion refer to page 145 gt Destination entry by voice refer to page 148 gt Destination entry via the Concierge serv ice refer to page 147 You can also store a navigation destination on the programmable memory buttons refer to page 25 Entries in stationary vehicle Enter data only when the vehicle is sta tionary and always give priority to the applica ble traffic regulations in the event of any con tradiction between traffic and road conditions and the instructions issued by the navigation 142 system Failure to take to this precaution can place you in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants and other road users in danger lt Manual destina
336. ustermann Office Calling a contact i Contact with one stored phone number Cl Contact with more than one stored phone number X Call not possible mobile phone without reception or network or Service Request is active For contacts with one stored phone number select the required contact The connection is being established For contacts with more than one stored phone number select the required contact and the phone number The connection is being estab lished Editing a contact Changing the entries in Contacts When a contact is changed the changes are not stored on the mobile phone A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle 1 Highlight the contact 2 Open Options 3 Edit entry The contact can be edited Redialing General information The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone is transmitted to the vehicle depending on the mobile phone Possibly only those numbers are displayed that were dialed from the vehicle The 20 phone numbers dialed last are dis played The sorting order of the phone num bers depends on the particular mobile phone Dialing a number via the instrument cluster This is possible if a call is not currently active iF Press the button on the steering wheel 2 Select the desired phone number The connection is established Dialing the number via the iDrive 1 Telephone 2 Redial y Telephone Active calls Phone book v Redial Received
337. ways highways are avoided wherever possible gt Avoid toll roads toll roads are avoided wherever possible gt Avoid ferries ferries are avoided where possible Route Different views of the route are available during destination guidance gt Arrow view gt List of route sections gt Map view refer to page 153 Arrow view The following information is displayed during destination guidance gt Large arrow indicates the current direction of travel gt Street name of the currently traveled street 152 gt Small arrow indicates the next change in direction Intersection view Lane information Traffic bulletins Distance to the next change in direction VV VV OV Street name at the next change in direc tion Lane information On multilane roads the recommended lanes are marked in the arrow view by a triangle gt Solid triangle best lane gt Empty triangle possible lane However another lane change may be needed shortly Displaying list of route sections When destination guidance is activated a list of route sections can be displayed The driving distance and traffic bulletins are displayed for each route section 1 Navigation 2 Route information 3 Highlight route section The route section is displayed on the split screen Bypassing a section of the route Calculate a new route for a route section 1 Navigation 2 Route information
338. word OIL about 3 minutes if the car is at a standstill 2 Press button 2 in the turn indicator lever on a level surface or about 5 minutes while The oil level is checked and the reading the car is on the move displayed 3 Oil level at minimum add engine oil as soon as possible but no more Possible displays than 1 US quart 1 liter Too much engine oil 4 Oillevel is too high Have the vehicle checked immediately 5 The oil level sensor is defective Do not otherwise surplus oil can lead to engine dam add engine oil It is possible to continue age lt driving Note the newly calculated remain ing mileage until the next oil service Have the system checked as soon as possible Display via iDrive 1 Vehicle Info 239 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Mobility Engine compartment 2 Vehicle status E Vehicle Info 3 Onboard info v Trip computer Vehicle status Engine oil level ES Vehicle status as ee Tr Engine oil level oil level a Possible messages gt gt gt Engine oil level OK Measurement not possible at this time Measuring engine oil level Duration with the engine running ap prox 3 minutes Duration while driving approx 5 minutes If engine oil was added it may take up to 30 minutes to obtain an oil level reading Engine oil level below minimum Add 1 quart Add a maximum of 1 US quart 1 liter of en gine oil at the next oppo
339. your vehi cle contain data memories that store technical information on the vehicle condition events and faults either temporarily or permanently This technical information generally docu ments the state of a component a module a system or the environment gt Operating conditions of system compo nents such as filling levels gt Status messages from the vehicle and its individual components such as wheel rpm speed motion delay transverse accelera tion gt Malfunctions and defects in important sys tem components such as lights and brakes gt Vehicle responses to special driving situa tions such as airbag deployment use of the stability control systems gt Ambient conditions such as the tempera ture These data are of a technical nature only and are used to detect and eliminate faults and to optimize vehicle functions Travel profiles of routes driven with the vehicle cannot be cre ated from these data If services are used for instance in the event of repairs service proc esses warranty cases quality assurance etc this technical information can be read out from the event and fault data memories by service personnel including the manufacturer using special diagnosis tools This service personnel can provide you with more information if needed After troubleshooting the information in the fault memory is cleared or overwritten continuously Situations are conceivable during the use of th
340. ystems or functions may not be fully availa ble After a battery replacement have the battery registered on the vehicle by your service cen ter to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available Charging the battery Note Do not connect the charger to the socket Do not connect the battery charger to the socket installed in the vehicle at the factory as this could damage the vehicle Starting aid terminals Only charge using the starting aid terminals refer to page 252 in the engine compartment while the engine is switched off Power failure After a temporary power loss some equipment needs to be reinitialized Individual settings need to be reprogrammed gt Seat and mirror memory store the posi tions again refer to page 51 gt Time update refer to page 78 gt Date update refer to page 79 249 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 104 II 15 Mobility Replacing components gt Radio station store again refer to page 164 gt Navigation system wait for the operability of the navigation gt Interior rearview mirror with digital com pass recalibrate refer to page 118 Disposing of old batteries Have old batteries disposed of by your service center or bring them to a recy cling center Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport Fuses Notes Replacing fuses

BMW Z4 Owner's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents